linux/include/net/mac80211.h
<<
>>
Prefs
   1/* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
   2/*
   3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
   4 *
   5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
   6 * Copyright 2006-2007  Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
   7 * Copyright 2007-2010  Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
   8 * Copyright 2013-2014  Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
   9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
  10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2021 Intel Corporation
  11 */
  12
  13#ifndef MAC80211_H
  14#define MAC80211_H
  15
  16#include <linux/bug.h>
  17#include <linux/kernel.h>
  18#include <linux/if_ether.h>
  19#include <linux/skbuff.h>
  20#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
  21#include <net/cfg80211.h>
  22#include <net/codel.h>
  23#include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
  24#include <asm/unaligned.h>
  25
  26/**
  27 * DOC: Introduction
  28 *
  29 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
  30 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
  31 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
  32 * drivers.
  33 */
  34
  35/**
  36 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
  37 *
  38 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
  39 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
  40 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
  41 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
  42 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
  43 * tasklet function.
  44 *
  45 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
  46 *       use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
  47 */
  48
  49/**
  50 * DOC: Warning
  51 *
  52 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
  53 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
  54 */
  55
  56/**
  57 * DOC: Frame format
  58 *
  59 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
  60 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
  61 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
  62 * hardware.
  63 *
  64 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
  65 *
  66 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
  67 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
  68 *
  69 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
  70 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
  71 */
  72
  73/**
  74 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
  75 *
  76 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
  77 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
  78 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
  79 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
  80 *
  81 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
  82 * suspend.
  83 *
  84 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
  85 *
  86 */
  87
  88/**
  89 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
  90 *
  91 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
  92 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
  93 * between different stations/interfaces.
  94 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
  95 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
  96 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
  97 *
  98 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
  99 * driver operation.
 100 *
 101 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
 102 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
 103 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
 104 *
 105 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
 106 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
 107 *
 108 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
 109 * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
 110 * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
 111 *
 112 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
 113 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
 114 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
 115 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
 116 * ieee80211_return_txq().
 117 *
 118 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
 119 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
 120 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
 121 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
 122 * .release_buffered_frames().
 123 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
 124 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
 125 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
 126 */
 127
 128struct device;
 129
 130/**
 131 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
 132 *
 133 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
 134 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
 135 */
 136enum ieee80211_max_queues {
 137        IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES =          16,
 138        IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP =       BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
 139};
 140
 141#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE        0xff
 142
 143/**
 144 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
 145 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
 146 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
 147 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
 148 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
 149 */
 150enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
 151        IEEE80211_AC_VO         = 0,
 152        IEEE80211_AC_VI         = 1,
 153        IEEE80211_AC_BE         = 2,
 154        IEEE80211_AC_BK         = 3,
 155};
 156
 157/**
 158 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
 159 *
 160 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
 161 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
 162 *
 163 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
 164 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
 165 *      2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
 166 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
 167 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
 168 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
 169 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
 170 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
 171 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
 172 */
 173struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
 174        u16 txop;
 175        u16 cw_min;
 176        u16 cw_max;
 177        u8 aifs;
 178        bool acm;
 179        bool uapsd;
 180        bool mu_edca;
 181        struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
 182};
 183
 184struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
 185        unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
 186        unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
 187        unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
 188        unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
 189};
 190
 191/**
 192 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
 193 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
 194 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
 195 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
 196 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
 197 *      this is used only with channel switching with CSA
 198 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
 199 */
 200enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
 201        IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH          = BIT(0),
 202        IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS      = BIT(1),
 203        IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR          = BIT(2),
 204        IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL        = BIT(3),
 205        IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH      = BIT(4),
 206};
 207
 208/**
 209 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
 210 *
 211 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
 212 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
 213 *
 214 * @def: the channel definition
 215 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
 216 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
 217 *      active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
 218 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
 219 *      after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
 220 *      this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
 221 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
 222 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
 223 *      sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
 224 */
 225struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
 226        struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
 227        struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
 228
 229        u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
 230
 231        bool radar_enabled;
 232
 233        u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
 234};
 235
 236/**
 237 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
 238 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
 239 *      exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
 240 *      needs to be switched from one to the other.
 241 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
 242 *      to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
 243 *      will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
 244 *      from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
 245 *      implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
 246 *      hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
 247 *      will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
 248 *      for changes/removal.)
 249 */
 250enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
 251        CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
 252        CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
 253};
 254
 255/**
 256 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
 257 *
 258 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
 259 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another.  The
 260 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
 261 * done.
 262 *
 263 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
 264 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
 265 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
 266 */
 267struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
 268        struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
 269        struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
 270        struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
 271};
 272
 273/**
 274 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
 275 *
 276 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
 277 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
 278 *
 279 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
 280 *      also implies a change in the AID.
 281 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
 282 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
 283 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
 284 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
 285 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
 286 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
 287 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
 288 *      reason (IBSS and managed mode)
 289 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
 290 *      new beacon (beaconing modes)
 291 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
 292 *      enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
 293 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
 294 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
 295 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
 296 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
 297 *      that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
 298 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
 299 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
 300 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
 301 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
 302 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
 303 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
 304 *      changed
 305 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
 306 *      currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
 307 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
 308 *      note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
 309 *      context had been assigned.
 310 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
 311 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
 312 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
 313 *      keep alive) changed.
 314 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
 315 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fime timing reasurement request responder
 316 *      functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
 317 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
 318 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
 319 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed
 320 * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed.
 321 * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
 322 *      status changed.
 323 *
 324 */
 325enum ieee80211_bss_change {
 326        BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC               = 1<<0,
 327        BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT        = 1<<1,
 328        BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE        = 1<<2,
 329        BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT            = 1<<3,
 330        BSS_CHANGED_HT                  = 1<<4,
 331        BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES         = 1<<5,
 332        BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT          = 1<<6,
 333        BSS_CHANGED_BSSID               = 1<<7,
 334        BSS_CHANGED_BEACON              = 1<<8,
 335        BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED      = 1<<9,
 336        BSS_CHANGED_CQM                 = 1<<10,
 337        BSS_CHANGED_IBSS                = 1<<11,
 338        BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER          = 1<<12,
 339        BSS_CHANGED_QOS                 = 1<<13,
 340        BSS_CHANGED_IDLE                = 1<<14,
 341        BSS_CHANGED_SSID                = 1<<15,
 342        BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP       = 1<<16,
 343        BSS_CHANGED_PS                  = 1<<17,
 344        BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER             = 1<<18,
 345        BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS              = 1<<19,
 346        BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO         = 1<<20,
 347        BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH           = 1<<21,
 348        BSS_CHANGED_OCB                 = 1<<22,
 349        BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS           = 1<<23,
 350        BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE          = 1<<24,
 351        BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE          = 1<<25,
 352        BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER       = 1<<26,
 353        BSS_CHANGED_TWT                 = 1<<27,
 354        BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD          = 1<<28,
 355        BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR        = 1<<29,
 356        BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY      = 1<<30,
 357        BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31,
 358
 359        /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
 360};
 361
 362/*
 363 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
 364 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
 365 * filtering will be disabled.
 366 */
 367#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
 368
 369/**
 370 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
 371 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
 372 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
 373 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
 374 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
 375 *      they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
 376 *      once each time the timeout triggers.
 377 */
 378enum ieee80211_event_type {
 379        RSSI_EVENT,
 380        MLME_EVENT,
 381        BAR_RX_EVENT,
 382        BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
 383};
 384
 385/**
 386 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
 387 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
 388 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
 389 */
 390enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
 391        RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
 392        RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
 393};
 394
 395/**
 396 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
 397 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
 398 */
 399struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
 400        enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
 401};
 402
 403/**
 404 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
 405 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
 406 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
 407 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
 408 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
 409 */
 410enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
 411        AUTH_EVENT,
 412        ASSOC_EVENT,
 413        DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
 414        DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
 415};
 416
 417/**
 418 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
 419 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
 420 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
 421 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
 422 */
 423enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
 424        MLME_SUCCESS,
 425        MLME_DENIED,
 426        MLME_TIMEOUT,
 427};
 428
 429/**
 430 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
 431 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
 432 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
 433 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
 434 */
 435struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
 436        enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
 437        enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
 438        u16 reason;
 439};
 440
 441/**
 442 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
 443 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
 444 * @tid: the tid
 445 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
 446 */
 447struct ieee80211_ba_event {
 448        struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
 449        u16 tid;
 450        u16 ssn;
 451};
 452
 453/**
 454 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
 455 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
 456 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
 457 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
 458 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
 459 * @u:union holding the fields above
 460 */
 461struct ieee80211_event {
 462        enum ieee80211_event_type type;
 463        union {
 464                struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
 465                struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
 466                struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
 467        } u;
 468};
 469
 470/**
 471 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
 472 *
 473 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
 474 *
 475 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
 476 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
 477 */
 478struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
 479        u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
 480        u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
 481};
 482
 483/**
 484 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
 485 *
 486 * @lci: LCI subelement content
 487 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
 488 * @lci_len: LCI data length
 489 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
 490 */
 491struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
 492        const u8 *lci;
 493        const u8 *civicloc;
 494        size_t lci_len;
 495        size_t civicloc_len;
 496};
 497
 498/**
 499 * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from
 500 * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail.
 501 *
 502 * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
 503 * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
 504 */
 505struct ieee80211_fils_discovery {
 506        u32 min_interval;
 507        u32 max_interval;
 508};
 509
 510/**
 511 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
 512 *
 513 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
 514 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
 515 *
 516 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
 517 * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
 518 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
 519 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
 520 *      ACK, BACK or both
 521 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
 522 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
 523 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
 524 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
 525 *      mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
 526 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
 527 *      mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
 528 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames
 529 * @twt_broadcast: does this BSS support broadcast TWT
 530 * @assoc: association status
 531 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
 532 *      or not
 533 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
 534 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
 535 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
 536 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
 537 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
 538 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
 539 *      valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
 540 *      with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
 541 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
 542 *      as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
 543 *      HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
 544 *      only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
 545 *      association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
 546 *      %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
 547 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
 548 *      the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
 549 *      (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
 550 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
 551 *      is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
 552 *      IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
 553 *      by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
 554 *      guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
 555 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
 556 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
 557 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
 558 *      index into the rate table configured by the driver in
 559 *      the current band.
 560 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
 561 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
 562 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
 563 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
 564 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
 565 *      configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
 566 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
 567 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
 568 *      This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
 569 *      Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
 570 *      be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
 571 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
 572 *      implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
 573 *      cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
 574 *      relation to the newly configured threshold.
 575 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
 576 *      implies disabled.  This is an alternative mechanism to the single
 577 *      threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
 578 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
 579 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
 580 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
 581 *      may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
 582 *      The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
 583 *      to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
 584 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
 585 *      may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
 586 *      array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
 587 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
 588 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
 589 *      hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
 590 *      your driver/device needs to do.
 591 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
 592 *      offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
 593 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
 594 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
 595 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
 596 * @txpower: TX power in dBm.  INT_MIN means not configured.
 597 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
 598 *      Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
 599 *      TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
 600 *      NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
 601 *      userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
 602 *      NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
 603 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
 604 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
 605 *      to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
 606 *      if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
 607 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
 608 *      transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
 609 *      In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
 610 *      a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
 611 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
 612 *      protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
 613 *      station.
 614 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
 615 *      responder functionality.
 616 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
 617 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
 618 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
 619 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
 620 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
 621 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
 622 *      nontransmitted BSSIDs
 623 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
 624 *      in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
 625 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are
 626 *      connected to (STA)
 627 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
 628 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE
 629 * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration
 630 * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
 631 *      interval.
 632 * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format).
 633 * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed
 634 *      to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware.
 635 * @power_type: power type of BSS for 6 GHz
 636 * @tx_pwr_env: transmit power envelope array of BSS.
 637 * @tx_pwr_env_num: number of @tx_pwr_env.
 638 * @pwr_reduction: power constraint of BSS.
 639 */
 640struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
 641        const u8 *bssid;
 642        u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
 643        bool uora_exists;
 644        u8 uora_ocw_range;
 645        u16 frame_time_rts_th;
 646        bool he_support;
 647        bool twt_requester;
 648        bool twt_responder;
 649        bool twt_protected;
 650        bool twt_broadcast;
 651        /* association related data */
 652        bool assoc, ibss_joined;
 653        bool ibss_creator;
 654        u16 aid;
 655        /* erp related data */
 656        bool use_cts_prot;
 657        bool use_short_preamble;
 658        bool use_short_slot;
 659        bool enable_beacon;
 660        u8 dtim_period;
 661        u16 beacon_int;
 662        u16 assoc_capability;
 663        u64 sync_tsf;
 664        u32 sync_device_ts;
 665        u8 sync_dtim_count;
 666        u32 basic_rates;
 667        struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
 668        int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
 669        u16 ht_operation_mode;
 670        s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
 671        u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
 672        s32 cqm_rssi_low;
 673        s32 cqm_rssi_high;
 674        struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
 675        struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
 676        __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
 677        int arp_addr_cnt;
 678        bool qos;
 679        bool idle;
 680        bool ps;
 681        u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
 682        size_t ssid_len;
 683        bool hidden_ssid;
 684        int txpower;
 685        enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
 686        struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
 687        bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
 688        u16 max_idle_period;
 689        bool protected_keep_alive;
 690        bool ftm_responder;
 691        struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
 692        /* Multiple BSSID data */
 693        bool nontransmitted;
 694        u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
 695        u8 bssid_index;
 696        u8 bssid_indicator;
 697        bool ema_ap;
 698        u8 profile_periodicity;
 699        struct {
 700                u32 params;
 701                u16 nss_set;
 702        } he_oper;
 703        struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
 704        struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color;
 705        struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery;
 706        u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval;
 707        bool s1g;
 708        struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate;
 709        enum ieee80211_ap_reg_power power_type;
 710        struct ieee80211_tx_pwr_env tx_pwr_env[IEEE80211_TPE_MAX_IE_COUNT];
 711        u8 tx_pwr_env_num;
 712        u8 pwr_reduction;
 713};
 714
 715/**
 716 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
 717 *
 718 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
 719 *
 720 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
 721 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
 722 *      number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
 723 *      number and increasing the sequence number only when the
 724 *      IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
 725 *      assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
 726 *      for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
 727 *      that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
 728 *      If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
 729 *      assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
 730 *      802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
 731 *      beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
 732 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
 733 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
 734 *      station
 735 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
 736 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
 737 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
 738 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
 739 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
 740 *      because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
 741 *      avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
 742 *      firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
 743 *      went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
 744 *      the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
 745 *      that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
 746 *      since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
 747 *      hardware queue.
 748 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
 749 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
 750 *      is for the whole aggregation.
 751 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
 752 *      so consider using block ack request (BAR).
 753 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
 754 *      set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
 755 *      be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
 756 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
 757 *      that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
 758 *      off-channel operation.
 759 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation
 760 *      (header conversion)
 761 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
 762 *      used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
 763 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
 764 *      used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
 765 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
 766 *      frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
 767 *      be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
 768 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
 769 *      transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
 770 *      by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
 771 *      queue gets full.
 772 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
 773 *      after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
 774 *      be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
 775 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
 776 *      code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
 777 *      should kick the MLME state machine.
 778 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
 779 *      MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
 780 *      status to user space)
 781 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
 782 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
 783 *      frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
 784 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
 785 *      the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
 786 *      in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
 787 *      handled properly by the device.
 788 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
 789 *      testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
 790 *      TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
 791 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
 792 *      This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
 793 *      frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
 794 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
 795 *      when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
 796 *      an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
 797 *      the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
 798 *      PS-Poll responses.
 799 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
 800 *      This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
 801 *      the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
 802 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
 803 *      would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
 804 *      monitor injection).
 805 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
 806 *      IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
 807 *      any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
 808 *      This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
 809 *      behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
 810 *
 811 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
 812 *       forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
 813 */
 814enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
 815        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS          = BIT(0),
 816        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ             = BIT(1),
 817        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK                 = BIT(2),
 818        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT          = BIT(3),
 819        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT         = BIT(4),
 820        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM        = BIT(5),
 821        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU                  = BIT(6),
 822        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED               = BIT(7),
 823        IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED           = BIT(8),
 824        IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK                   = BIT(9),
 825        IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU                 = BIT(10),
 826        IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK         = BIT(11),
 827        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE        = BIT(12),
 828        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK        = BIT(13),
 829        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP         = BIT(14),
 830        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED              = BIT(15),
 831        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT         = BIT(16),
 832        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER           = BIT(17),
 833        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES            = BIT(18),
 834        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION       = BIT(19),
 835        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX         = BIT(20),
 836        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX     = BIT(21),
 837        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC                   = BIT(22),
 838        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC                   = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
 839        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN             = BIT(25),
 840        IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE     = BIT(26),
 841        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE            = BIT(27),
 842        IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP                = BIT(28),
 843        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE            = BIT(29),
 844        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG               = BIT(30),
 845        IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED     = BIT(31),
 846};
 847
 848#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT             23
 849
 850#define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS
 851
 852/**
 853 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
 854 *
 855 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
 856 *      protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
 857 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
 858 *      frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
 859 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
 860 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
 861 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
 862 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
 863 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
 864 *      used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
 865 *      it can be sent out.
 866 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that
 867 *      has already been assigned to this frame.
 868 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered
 869 *      relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent
 870 *      of their QoS TID or other priority field values.
 871 *
 872 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
 873 */
 874enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
 875        IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO       = BIT(0),
 876        IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE           = BIT(1),
 877        IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT           = BIT(2),
 878        IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU                 = BIT(3),
 879        IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT             = BIT(4),
 880        IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP     = BIT(5),
 881        IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING   = BIT(6),
 882        IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO              = BIT(7),
 883        IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER          = BIT(8),
 884};
 885
 886/*
 887 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
 888 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
 889 */
 890#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK |               \
 891        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT |    \
 892        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU |           \
 893        IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK |               \
 894        IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK |           \
 895        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER |    \
 896        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC |                \
 897        IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
 898
 899/**
 900 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
 901 *      Rate Control algorithm.
 902 *
 903 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
 904 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
 905 *
 906 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
 907 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
 908 *      This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
 909 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
 910 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
 911 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
 912 *      into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
 913 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
 914 *      Greenfield mode.
 915 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
 916 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
 917 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
 918 *      (80+80 isn't supported yet)
 919 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
 920 *      adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
 921 *      NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
 922 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
 923 */
 924enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
 925        IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS             = BIT(0),
 926        IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT         = BIT(1),
 927        IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE      = BIT(2),
 928
 929        /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
 930        IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS                     = BIT(3),
 931        IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD             = BIT(4),
 932        IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH            = BIT(5),
 933        IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA                = BIT(6),
 934        IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI                = BIT(7),
 935        IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS                 = BIT(8),
 936        IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH            = BIT(9),
 937        IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH           = BIT(10),
 938};
 939
 940
 941/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
 942#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
 943
 944/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
 945#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
 946
 947/* maximum number of rate stages */
 948#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES  4
 949
 950/* maximum number of rate table entries */
 951#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE    4
 952
 953/**
 954 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
 955 *
 956 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
 957 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
 958 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
 959 *
 960 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
 961 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
 962 *
 963 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
 964 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
 965 *
 966 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
 967 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
 968 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
 969 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
 970 * information::
 971 *
 972 *    { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
 973 *
 974 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
 975 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
 976 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
 977 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
 978 * information should then contain::
 979 *
 980 *   { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
 981 *
 982 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
 983 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
 984 */
 985struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
 986        s8 idx;
 987        u16 count:5,
 988            flags:11;
 989} __packed;
 990
 991#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY          31
 992
 993static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
 994                                          u8 mcs, u8 nss)
 995{
 996        WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
 997        WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
 998        rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
 999}
1000
1001static inline u8
1002ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
1003{
1004        return rate->idx & 0xF;
1005}
1006
1007static inline u8
1008ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
1009{
1010        return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
1011}
1012
1013/**
1014 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
1015 *
1016 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
1017 *  (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
1018 *  (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
1019 *  (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
1020 *
1021 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
1022 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
1023 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
1024 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
1025 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally
1026 * @control: union part for control data
1027 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
1028 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
1029 * @control.use_rts: use RTS
1030 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
1031 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
1032 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
1033 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
1034 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
1035 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
1036 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
1037 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
1038 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
1039 * @pad: padding
1040 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
1041 * @status: union part for status data
1042 * @status.rates: attempted rates
1043 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
1044 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
1045 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
1046 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
1047 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only
1048 *      used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness
1049 * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid
1050 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
1051 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
1052 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
1053 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
1054 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
1055 *      relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1056 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
1057 *      relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1058 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1059 */
1060struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1061        /* common information */
1062        u32 flags;
1063        u32 band:3,
1064            ack_frame_id:13,
1065            hw_queue:4,
1066            tx_time_est:10;
1067        /* 2 free bits */
1068
1069        union {
1070                struct {
1071                        union {
1072                                /* rate control */
1073                                struct {
1074                                        struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1075                                                IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1076                                        s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1077                                        u8 use_rts:1;
1078                                        u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1079                                        u8 short_preamble:1;
1080                                        u8 skip_table:1;
1081                                        /* 2 bytes free */
1082                                };
1083                                /* only needed before rate control */
1084                                unsigned long jiffies;
1085                        };
1086                        /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1087                        struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1088                        struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1089                        u32 flags;
1090                        codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1091                } control;
1092                struct {
1093                        u64 cookie;
1094                } ack;
1095                struct {
1096                        struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1097                        s32 ack_signal;
1098                        u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1099                        u8 ampdu_len;
1100                        u8 antenna;
1101                        u16 tx_time;
1102                        bool is_valid_ack_signal;
1103                        void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
1104                } status;
1105                struct {
1106                        struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1107                                IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1108                        u8 pad[4];
1109
1110                        void *rate_driver_data[
1111                                IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1112                };
1113                void *driver_data[
1114                        IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1115        };
1116};
1117
1118static inline u16
1119ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est)
1120{
1121        /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime
1122         * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1
1123         */
1124        info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2;
1125        return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1126}
1127
1128static inline u16
1129ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1130{
1131        return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1132}
1133
1134/**
1135 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx staus info for rate control
1136 *
1137 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1138 * @info: Basic tx status information
1139 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1140 * @rate: The TX rate that was used when sending the packet
1141 * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver
1142 */
1143struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1144        struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1145        struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1146        struct sk_buff *skb;
1147        struct rate_info *rate;
1148        struct list_head *free_list;
1149};
1150
1151/**
1152 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1153 *
1154 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1155 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1156 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1157 *
1158 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1159 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1160 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1161 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1162 */
1163struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1164        const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1165        size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1166        const u8 *common_ies;
1167        size_t common_ie_len;
1168};
1169
1170
1171static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1172{
1173        return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1174}
1175
1176static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1177{
1178        return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1179}
1180
1181/**
1182 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1183 *
1184 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1185 *
1186 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1187 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1188 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1189 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1190 *
1191 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1192 *       info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1193 *       instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1194 */
1195static inline void
1196ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1197{
1198        int i;
1199
1200        BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1201                     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1202        BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1203                     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1204        BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1205        /* clear the rate counts */
1206        for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1207                info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1208
1209        BUILD_BUG_ON(
1210            offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
1211        memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1212               sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1213               offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1214}
1215
1216
1217/**
1218 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1219 *
1220 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1221 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1222 *      Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1223 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1224 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1225 *      verification has been done by the hardware.
1226 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1227 *      If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1228 *      hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1229 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1230 *      flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1231 *      Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1232 *      is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1233 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1234 *      de-duplication by itself.
1235 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1236 *      the frame.
1237 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1238 *      the frame.
1239 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1240 *      field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1241 *      was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1242 *      merging.
1243 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1244 *      field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1245 *      (including FCS) was received.
1246 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1247 *      field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1248 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1249 *      Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1250 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1251 *      number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1252 *      each A-MPDU
1253 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1254 *      subframes of a single A-MPDU
1255 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1256 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1257 *      on this subframe
1258 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1259 *      is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1260 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1261 *      done by the hardware
1262 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1263 *      processing it in any regular way.
1264 *      This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1265 *      them for sniffing purposes.
1266 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1267 *      monitor interfaces.
1268 *      This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1269 *      them for sniffing purposes.
1270 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1271 *      subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1272 *      All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1273 *      if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1274 *      the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1275 *      deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1276 *      subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1277 *      either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1278 *      interleaved with other frames.
1279 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1280 *      radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1281 *      the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1282 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1283 *      This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1284 *      the first subframe.
1285 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1286 *      be done in the hardware.
1287 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1288 *      frame
1289 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1290 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1291 *      (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1292 *      
1293 *       - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1294 *       - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1295 *       - DATA3_CODING
1296 *       - DATA5_GI
1297 *       - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1298 *       - DATA6_NSTS
1299 *       - DATA3_STBC
1300 *      
1301 *      from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1302 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1303 *      (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1304 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1305 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1306 *      the "0-length PSDU" field included there.  The value for it is
1307 *      in &struct ieee80211_rx_status.  Note that if this value isn't
1308 *      known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1309 * @RX_FLAG_8023: the frame has an 802.3 header (decap offload performed by
1310 *      hardware or driver)
1311 */
1312enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1313        RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR              = BIT(0),
1314        RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED               = BIT(1),
1315        RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START      = BIT(2),
1316        RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED           = BIT(3),
1317        RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED             = BIT(4),
1318        RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC          = BIT(5),
1319        RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC         = BIT(6),
1320        RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START           = BIT(7),
1321        RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL           = BIT(8),
1322        RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS           = BIT(9),
1323        RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED            = BIT(10),
1324        RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED           = BIT(11),
1325        RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN        = BIT(12),
1326        RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST           = BIT(13),
1327        RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR   = BIT(14),
1328        RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN   = BIT(15),
1329        RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END             = BIT(16),
1330        RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR            = BIT(17),
1331        RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR            = BIT(18),
1332        RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE              = BIT(19),
1333        RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA    = BIT(20),
1334        RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED            = BIT(21),
1335        RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN           = BIT(22),
1336        RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED            = BIT(23),
1337        RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT           = BIT(24),
1338        RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN     = BIT(25),
1339        RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE             = BIT(26),
1340        RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU          = BIT(27),
1341        RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG           = BIT(28),
1342        RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU                 = BIT(29),
1343        RX_FLAG_8023                    = BIT(30),
1344};
1345
1346/**
1347 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1348 *
1349 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1350 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1351 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1352 *      if the driver fills this value it should add
1353 *      %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1354 *      to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1355 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1356 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1357 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1358 */
1359enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1360        RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE            = BIT(0),
1361        RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI            = BIT(2),
1362        RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF               = BIT(3),
1363        RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK           = BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1364        RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC                = BIT(6),
1365        RX_ENC_FLAG_BF                  = BIT(7),
1366};
1367
1368#define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT          4
1369
1370enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1371        RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1372        RX_ENC_HT,
1373        RX_ENC_VHT,
1374        RX_ENC_HE,
1375};
1376
1377/**
1378 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1379 *
1380 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1381 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1382 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1383 *
1384 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1385 *      (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1386 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1387 *      needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1388 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1389 *      it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1390 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1391 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1392 *      This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1393 *      for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1394 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz.
1395 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1396 *      unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1397 *      @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1398 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1399 *      values were filled.
1400 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1401 *      support dB or unspecified units)
1402 * @antenna: antenna used
1403 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1404 *      HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1405 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1406 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1407 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1408 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1409 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1410 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1411 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1412 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1413 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1414 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1415 *      each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1416 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1417 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1418 */
1419struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1420        u64 mactime;
1421        u64 boottime_ns;
1422        u32 device_timestamp;
1423        u32 ampdu_reference;
1424        u32 flag;
1425        u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1;
1426        u8 enc_flags;
1427        u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1428        u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1429        u8 rate_idx;
1430        u8 nss;
1431        u8 rx_flags;
1432        u8 band;
1433        u8 antenna;
1434        s8 signal;
1435        u8 chains;
1436        s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1437        u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1438        u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1439};
1440
1441static inline u32
1442ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status)
1443{
1444        return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) +
1445               (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0);
1446}
1447
1448/**
1449 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1450 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1451 *      (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1452 *       bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1453 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1454 *      alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1455 *      description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1456 *      Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1457 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1458 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1459 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1460 *      then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1461 *      @data field.
1462 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1463 *      the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1464 *      length
1465 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1466 *
1467 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1468 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1469 * data.
1470 */
1471struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1472        u32 present;
1473        u8 align;
1474        u8 oui[3];
1475        u8 subns;
1476        u8 pad;
1477        u16 len;
1478        u8 data[];
1479} __packed;
1480
1481/**
1482 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1483 *
1484 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1485 *
1486 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1487 *      to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1488 *      or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1489 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1490 *      This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1491 *      meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1492 *      transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1493 *      Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1494 *      driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1495 *      for more.
1496 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1497 *      the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1498 *      may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1499 *      be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1500 *      it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1501 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1502 *      operating channel.
1503 */
1504enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1505        IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR          = (1<<0),
1506        IEEE80211_CONF_PS               = (1<<1),
1507        IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE             = (1<<2),
1508        IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL       = (1<<3),
1509};
1510
1511
1512/**
1513 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1514 *
1515 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1516 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1517 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1518 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1519 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1520 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1521 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1522 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1523 *      Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1524 *      otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1525 */
1526enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1527        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS              = BIT(1),
1528        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL   = BIT(2),
1529        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR           = BIT(3),
1530        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS                = BIT(4),
1531        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER             = BIT(5),
1532        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL           = BIT(6),
1533        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS      = BIT(7),
1534        IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE              = BIT(8),
1535};
1536
1537/**
1538 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1539 *
1540 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1541 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1542 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1543 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1544 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1545 */
1546enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1547        IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1548        IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1549        IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1550        IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1551
1552        /* keep last */
1553        IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1554};
1555
1556/**
1557 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1558 *
1559 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1560 *
1561 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1562 *
1563 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1564 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1565 *      in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1566 *      has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1567 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1568 *      powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1569 *      the CONF_PS flag is set.
1570 *
1571 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1572 *      value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1573 *
1574 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1575 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1576 *
1577 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1578 *      (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1579 *      but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1580 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1581 *      frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1582 *      number of transmissions not the number of retries
1583 *
1584 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1585 *      %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1586 *      configured for an HT channel.
1587 *      Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1588 *      otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1589 */
1590struct ieee80211_conf {
1591        u32 flags;
1592        int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1593
1594        u16 listen_interval;
1595        u8 ps_dtim_period;
1596
1597        u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1598
1599        struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1600        bool radar_enabled;
1601        enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1602};
1603
1604/**
1605 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1606 *
1607 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1608 * operation.
1609 *
1610 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1611 *      Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1612 *      announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1613 *      the driver passed into mac80211.
1614 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1615 *      rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1616 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1617 *      scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1618 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1619 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1620 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1621  *     current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1622  *     channel, expressed in TU.
1623 */
1624struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1625        u64 timestamp;
1626        u32 device_timestamp;
1627        bool block_tx;
1628        struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1629        u8 count;
1630        u32 delay;
1631};
1632
1633/**
1634 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1635 *
1636 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1637 *      on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1638 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1639 *      monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1640 *      connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1641 *      provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1642 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1643 *      interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1644 *      but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1645 *      only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1646 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1647 *      and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1648 *      this is not pure P2P vif.
1649 */
1650enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1651        IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER             = BIT(0),
1652        IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI         = BIT(1),
1653        IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD            = BIT(2),
1654        IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE            = BIT(3),
1655};
1656
1657
1658/**
1659 * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags
1660 *
1661 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled
1662 *      The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211.
1663 *      It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface.
1664 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload
1665 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED: rx encapsulation offload is enabled
1666 *      The driver supports passing received 802.11 frames as 802.3 frames to
1667 *      mac80211.
1668 */
1669
1670enum ieee80211_offload_flags {
1671        IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED         = BIT(0),
1672        IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR           = BIT(1),
1673        IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED         = BIT(2),
1674};
1675
1676/**
1677 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1678 *
1679 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1680 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1681 *
1682 * @type: type of this virtual interface
1683 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1684 *      or the BSS we're associated to
1685 * @addr: address of this interface
1686 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1687 *      interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1688 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1689 *      write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1690 *      for read access.
1691 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1692 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1693 *      these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1694 *      or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1695 *      at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1696 * @offloaad_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface.
1697 *      These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface,
1698 *      .change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver
1699 *      within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change
1700 *      restrictions.
1701 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1702 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1703 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1704 *      when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1705 *      path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1706 *      be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1707 *      processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1708 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1709 *      interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1710 *      monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1711 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1712 *      interface.
1713 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211
1714 *      for this interface.
1715 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1716 *      sizeof(void \*).
1717 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1718 * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1719 *      protected by fq->lock.
1720 * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see
1721 *      &enum ieee80211_offload_flags.
1722 * @color_change_active: marks whether a color change is ongoing. Internally it is
1723 *      write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1724 *      for read access.
1725 * @color_change_color: the bss color that will be used after the change.
1726 * @mbssid_tx_vif: Pointer to the transmitting interface if MBSSID is enabled.
1727 */
1728struct ieee80211_vif {
1729        enum nl80211_iftype type;
1730        struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1731        u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1732        bool p2p;
1733        bool csa_active;
1734        bool mu_mimo_owner;
1735
1736        u8 cab_queue;
1737        u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1738
1739        struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1740
1741        struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1742
1743        u32 driver_flags;
1744        u32 offload_flags;
1745
1746#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1747        struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1748#endif
1749
1750        bool probe_req_reg;
1751        bool rx_mcast_action_reg;
1752
1753        bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1754
1755        bool color_change_active;
1756        u8 color_change_color;
1757
1758        struct ieee80211_vif *mbssid_tx_vif;
1759
1760        /* must be last */
1761        u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1762};
1763
1764static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1765{
1766#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1767        return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1768#endif
1769        return false;
1770}
1771
1772/**
1773 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1774 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1775 *
1776 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1777 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1778 *
1779 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1780 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1781 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1782 */
1783struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1784
1785/**
1786 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1787 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1788 *
1789 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1790 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1791 * This can also be useful to get the netdev associated to a vif.
1792 */
1793struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1794
1795/**
1796 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1797 *
1798 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1799 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1800 *
1801 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1802 *      driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1803 *      particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1804 *      will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1805 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1806 *      the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1807 *      generation in software.
1808 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1809 *      that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1810 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1811 *      CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1812 *      (MFP) to be done in software.
1813 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1814 *      if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1815 *      itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1816 *      @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1817 *      not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1818 *      MIC.
1819 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1820 *      management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1821 *      crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1822 *      properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1823 *      fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1824 *      RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1825 *      %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1826 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1827 *      driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1828 *      only for managment frames (MFP).
1829 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1830 *      driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1831 *      be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1832 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1833 *      a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1834 *      @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1835 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1836 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
1837 *      for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
1838 *      generation only
1839 */
1840enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1841        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT     = BIT(0),
1842        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV          = BIT(1),
1843        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC        = BIT(2),
1844        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE             = BIT(3),
1845        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX           = BIT(4),
1846        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE         = BIT(5),
1847        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT              = BIT(6),
1848        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM     = BIT(7),
1849        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE        = BIT(8),
1850        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX           = BIT(9),
1851        IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE        = BIT(10),
1852};
1853
1854/**
1855 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1856 *
1857 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1858 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1859 *
1860 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1861 *      wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1862 *      encrypted in hardware.
1863 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1864 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1865 *      needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1866 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1867 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1868 * @keylen: key material length
1869 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1870 *      data block:
1871 *      - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1872 *      - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1873 *      - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1874 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1875 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1876 */
1877struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1878        atomic64_t tx_pn;
1879        u32 cipher;
1880        u8 icv_len;
1881        u8 iv_len;
1882        u8 hw_key_idx;
1883        s8 keyidx;
1884        u16 flags;
1885        u8 keylen;
1886        u8 key[];
1887};
1888
1889#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN    16
1890
1891#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1892#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1893
1894/**
1895 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1896 *
1897 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1898 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1899 *      reverse order than in packet)
1900 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1901 *      reverse order than in packet)
1902 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1903 *      reverse order than in packet)
1904 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1905 *      reverse order than in packet)
1906 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1907 */
1908struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1909        union {
1910                struct {
1911                        u32 iv32;
1912                        u16 iv16;
1913                } tkip;
1914                struct {
1915                        u8 pn[6];
1916                } ccmp;
1917                struct {
1918                        u8 pn[6];
1919                } aes_cmac;
1920                struct {
1921                        u8 pn[6];
1922                } aes_gmac;
1923                struct {
1924                        u8 pn[6];
1925                } gcmp;
1926                struct {
1927                        u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1928                        u8 seq_len;
1929                } hw;
1930        };
1931};
1932
1933/**
1934 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1935 *
1936 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1937 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1938 *
1939 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1940 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1941 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1942 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1943 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1944 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1945 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1946 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1947 *     key_idx value calculation:
1948 *      (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1949 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1950 */
1951struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1952        u32 cipher;
1953        u16 iftype;
1954        u8 hdr_len;
1955        u8 pn_len;
1956        u8 pn_off;
1957        u8 key_idx_off;
1958        u8 key_idx_mask;
1959        u8 key_idx_shift;
1960        u8 mic_len;
1961};
1962
1963/**
1964 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1965 *
1966 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1967 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1968 *
1969 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1970 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1971 */
1972enum set_key_cmd {
1973        SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1974};
1975
1976/**
1977 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1978 *
1979 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1980 *      this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1981 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1982 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1983 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1984 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1985 */
1986enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1987        /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1988        IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1989        IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1990        IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1991        IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1992        IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1993};
1994
1995/**
1996 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1997 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1998 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1999 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
2000 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
2001 *      (including 80+80 MHz)
2002 *
2003 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
2004 *      correctly, the values must be sorted.
2005 */
2006enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
2007        IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
2008        IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
2009        IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
2010        IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
2011};
2012
2013/**
2014 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
2015 *
2016 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
2017 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
2018 *      Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
2019 */
2020struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
2021        struct rcu_head rcu_head;
2022        struct {
2023                s8 idx;
2024                u8 count;
2025                u8 count_cts;
2026                u8 count_rts;
2027                u16 flags;
2028        } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
2029};
2030
2031/**
2032 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
2033 *
2034 * Used to configure txpower for station.
2035 *
2036 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
2037 *      to the STA.
2038 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
2039 *      will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
2040 *      %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
2041 *      NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
2042 *      per peer TPC.
2043 */
2044struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
2045        s16 power;
2046        enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
2047};
2048
2049/**
2050 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
2051 *
2052 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
2053 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
2054 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
2055 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
2056 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
2057 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
2058 *
2059 * @addr: MAC address
2060 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
2061 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
2062 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2063 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2064 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
2065 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities
2066 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
2067 *      that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
2068 *      Can be modified by driver.
2069 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
2070 *      otherwise always false)
2071 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
2072 *      sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
2073 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
2074 *      if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
2075 *      IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
2076 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
2077 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
2078 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
2079 *      station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
2080 *      notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
2081 *      the station moves to associated state.
2082 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
2083 * @rates: rate control selection table
2084 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
2085 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
2086 *      valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
2087 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
2088 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
2089 *      A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
2090 *      unlimited.
2091 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
2092 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
2093 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
2094 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration
2095 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
2096 *      the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
2097 */
2098struct ieee80211_sta {
2099        u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
2100        u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2101        u16 aid;
2102        struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
2103        struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
2104        struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
2105        struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa;
2106        u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2107        bool wme;
2108        u8 uapsd_queues;
2109        u8 max_sp;
2110        u8 rx_nss;
2111        enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
2112        enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
2113        struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
2114        bool tdls;
2115        bool tdls_initiator;
2116        bool mfp;
2117        u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
2118
2119        /**
2120         * @max_amsdu_len:
2121         * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
2122         * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
2123         * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
2124         *
2125         * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2126         *   A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2127         * * If the skb is not part of a BA aggreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2128         *   size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2129         *
2130         * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2131         * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2132         * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
2133         */
2134        u16 max_amsdu_len;
2135        bool support_p2p_ps;
2136        u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2137        u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2138        struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2139
2140        struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2141
2142        /* must be last */
2143        u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2144};
2145
2146/**
2147 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2148 *
2149 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2150 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2151 *
2152 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2153 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2154 */
2155enum sta_notify_cmd {
2156        STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2157};
2158
2159/**
2160 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2161 *
2162 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2163 *      it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2164 */
2165struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2166        struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2167};
2168
2169/**
2170 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2171 *
2172 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2173 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2174 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2175 *      %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2176 * @ac: the AC for this queue
2177 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2178 *
2179 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2180 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2181 */
2182struct ieee80211_txq {
2183        struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2184        struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2185        u8 tid;
2186        u8 ac;
2187
2188        /* must be last */
2189        u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2190};
2191
2192/**
2193 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2194 *
2195 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2196 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2197 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2198 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2199 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2200 *
2201 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2202 *      The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2203 *      controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2204 *      should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2205 *      will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2206 *      algorithm.
2207 *      Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2208 *      callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2209 *      the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2210 *      @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2211 *      timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2212 *      CCK frames.
2213 *
2214 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2215 *      Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2216 *      the FCS at the end.
2217 *
2218 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2219 *      Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2220 *      for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2221 *      rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2222 *      to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2223 *      multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2224 *      the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2225 *
2226 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2227 *      Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2228 *      expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2229 *      If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2230 *
2231 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2232 *      Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2233 *      one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2234 *      between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2235 *
2236 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2237 *      Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2238 *      Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2239 *
2240 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2241 *      Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2242 *
2243 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2244 *      Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2245 *
2246 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2247 *      Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2248 *      stack support for dynamic PS.
2249 *
2250 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2251 *      Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2252 *
2253 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2254 *      Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2255 *
2256 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2257 *      Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2258 *      the stack.
2259 *
2260 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2261 *      The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2262 *      periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2263 *
2264 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2265 *      This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2266 *      dtim_period).
2267 *
2268 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2269 *      per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2270 *      the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2271 *      to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2272 *      possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2273 *      only in that case.
2274 *
2275 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2276 *      autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2277 *      this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2278 *      stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2279 *      Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2280 *      the PS mode of connected stations.
2281 *
2282 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2283 *      setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2284 *      software.
2285 *
2286 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2287 *      a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2288 *      active interfaces.
2289 *
2290 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2291 *      be created.  It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2292 *      desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2293 *
2294 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2295 *      crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2296 *      try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2297 *      the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2298 *      supported cipher suites.
2299 *
2300 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2301 *      this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2302 *      for frames.
2303 *
2304 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2305 *      queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2306 *      for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2307 *      control for more details.
2308 *
2309 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2310 *      selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2311 *
2312 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2313 *      P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2314 *      is supported.
2315 *
2316 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2317 *      only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2318 *
2319 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2320 *      and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2321 *      using aggregation for such frames.)
2322 *
2323 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2324 *      for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2325 *      is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2326 *      CSA frame.
2327 *
2328 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2329 *      or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2330 *
2331 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2332 *      in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2333 *
2334 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2335 *      than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2336 *
2337 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2338 *      within A-MPDU.
2339 *
2340 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2341 *      for sent beacons.
2342 *
2343 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2344 *      station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2345 *      by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2346 *      from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2347 *
2348 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2349 *      reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2350 *      order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2351 *      timeout.
2352 *
2353 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2354 *      which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2355 *
2356 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2357 *      A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2358 *      When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2359 *      limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2360 *      max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2361 *
2362 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2363 *      skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2364 *
2365 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2366 *      by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2367 *      drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2368 *      is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2369 *
2370 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2371 *      The stack will not do fragmentation.
2372 *      The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2373 *
2374 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2375 *      TDLS links.
2376 *
2377 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2378 *      mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2379 *      deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2380 *      beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2381 *      virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2382 *      the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2383 *      deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2384 *
2385 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2386 *      support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2387 *
2388 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2389 *      course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2390 *
2391 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2392 *      extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2393 *      the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2394 *      but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2395 *      See also the documentation for that flag.
2396 *
2397 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2398 *      MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2399 *      TXQs to start with.
2400 *
2401 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2402 *      length in tx status information
2403 *
2404 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2405 *
2406 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2407 *      only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2408 *
2409 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2410 *      aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2411 *      A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2412 *
2413 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation
2414 *      offload
2415 *
2416 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports rx decapsulation
2417 *      offload
2418 *
2419 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP: Hardware supports concurrent rx
2420 *      decapsulation offload and passing raw 802.11 frames for monitor iface.
2421 *      If this is supported, the driver must pass both 802.3 frames for real
2422 *      usage and 802.11 frames with %RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR set for monitor to
2423 *      the stack.
2424 *
2425 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2426 */
2427enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2428        IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2429        IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2430        IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2431        IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2432        IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2433        IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2434        IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2435        IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2436        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2437        IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2438        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2439        IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2440        IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2441        IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2442        IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2443        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2444        IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2445        IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2446        IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2447        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2448        IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2449        IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2450        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2451        IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2452        IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2453        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2454        IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2455        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2456        IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2457        IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2458        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2459        IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2460        IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2461        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2462        IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2463        IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2464        IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2465        IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2466        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2467        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2468        IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2469        IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2470        IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2471        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2472        IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2473        IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2474        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2475        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2476        IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2477        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD,
2478        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD,
2479        IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP,
2480
2481        /* keep last, obviously */
2482        NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2483};
2484
2485/**
2486 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2487 *
2488 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2489 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2490 *
2491 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2492 *      802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2493 *      members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2494 *      and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2495 *      bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2496 *
2497 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2498 *
2499 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2500 *      along with this structure.
2501 *
2502 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2503 *
2504 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2505 *      for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2506 *
2507 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2508 *      Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2509 *
2510 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2511 *      only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2512 *
2513 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2514 *      that HW supports
2515 *
2516 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2517 *      data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2518 *      queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2519 *
2520 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2521 *      If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2522 *      set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2523 *
2524 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2525 *      within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2526 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2527 *      within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2528 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2529 *      within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2530 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2531 *      within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2532 *
2533 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2534 *      can handle.
2535 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2536 *      the hw can report back.
2537 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2538 *
2539 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2540 *      sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2541 *      aggregation.
2542 *      This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2543 *      number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2544 *      it shouldn't be set.
2545 *
2546 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2547 *      aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2548 *      advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2549 *      the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2550 *      with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2551 *      For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2552 *
2553 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2554 *      of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2555 *
2556 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2557 *      (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2558 *
2559 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2560 *      reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2561 *      include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2562 *      adding _BW is supported today.
2563 *
2564 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2565 *      the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2566 *      Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2567 *
2568 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2569 *
2570 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2571 *      @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2572 *      field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2573 *      device_timestamp.
2574 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2575 *      IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2576 *      IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2577 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2578 *      radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2579 *
2580 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2581 *      from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2582 *      other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2583 *
2584 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2585 *      for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2586 *      enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2587 *      Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2588 *      that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2589 *      neither enabled.
2590 *
2591 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2592 *      deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2593 *      Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2594 *
2595 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2596 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2597 *      supported by HW.
2598 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2599 *      device.
2600 *
2601 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2602 *      them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2603 *      unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2604 *
2605 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2606 *      refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2607 *
2608 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2609 */
2610struct ieee80211_hw {
2611        struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2612        struct wiphy *wiphy;
2613        const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2614        void *priv;
2615        unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2616        unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2617        unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2618        int vif_data_size;
2619        int sta_data_size;
2620        int chanctx_data_size;
2621        int txq_data_size;
2622        u16 queues;
2623        u16 max_listen_interval;
2624        s8 max_signal;
2625        u8 max_rates;
2626        u8 max_report_rates;
2627        u8 max_rate_tries;
2628        u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2629        u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2630        u8 max_tx_fragments;
2631        u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2632        u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2633        u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2634        struct {
2635                int units_pos;
2636                s16 accuracy;
2637        } radiotap_timestamp;
2638        netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2639        u8 uapsd_queues;
2640        u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2641        u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2642        const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2643        u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2644        u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2645        u8 weight_multiplier;
2646        u32 max_mtu;
2647};
2648
2649static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2650                                       enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2651{
2652        return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2653}
2654#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg)     _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2655
2656static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2657                                     enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2658{
2659        return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2660}
2661#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg)       _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2662
2663/**
2664 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2665 *
2666 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2667 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2668 */
2669struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2670        struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2671
2672        /* Keep last */
2673        struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2674};
2675
2676/**
2677 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2678 *
2679 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2680 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2681 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2682 * @status: channel-switch response status
2683 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2684 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2685 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2686 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2687 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2688 */
2689struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2690        struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2691        struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2692        u8 action_code;
2693        u32 status;
2694        u32 timestamp;
2695        u16 switch_time;
2696        u16 switch_timeout;
2697        struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2698        u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2699};
2700
2701/**
2702 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2703 *
2704 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2705 *
2706 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2707 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2708 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2709 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2710 * is already used internally by mac80211.
2711 *
2712 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2713 */
2714struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2715
2716/**
2717 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2718 *
2719 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2720 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2721 */
2722static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2723{
2724        set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2725}
2726
2727/**
2728 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2729 *
2730 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2731 * @addr: the address to set
2732 */
2733static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2734{
2735        memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2736}
2737
2738static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2739ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2740                      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2741{
2742        if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2743                return NULL;
2744        return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2745}
2746
2747static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2748ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2749                           const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2750{
2751        if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2752                return NULL;
2753        return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2754}
2755
2756static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2757ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2758                             const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2759{
2760        if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2761                return NULL;
2762        return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2763}
2764
2765/**
2766 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2767 * @hw: the hardware
2768 * @skb: the skb
2769 *
2770 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2771 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2772 */
2773void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2774
2775/**
2776 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2777 *
2778 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2779 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2780 *
2781 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2782 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2783 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2784 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2785 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2786 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2787 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2788 *
2789 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2790 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2791 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2792 *
2793 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2794 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2795 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2796 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2797 *
2798 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2799 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2800 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2801 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2802 *
2803 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2804 *
2805 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2806 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2807 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2808 * based on the receive flags.
2809 *
2810 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2811 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2812 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2813 * keys.
2814 *
2815 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2816 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2817 * handler.
2818 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2819 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2820 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2821 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2822 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2823 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2824 *
2825 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2826 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2827 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2828 *
2829 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2830 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following
2831 * requirements:
2832 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to mac80211
2833      once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been completed,
2834   2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
2835      at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
2836   3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
2837      encrypted with the new key when also needing
2838      @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV and
2839   4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
2840   Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
2841 */
2842
2843/**
2844 * DOC: Powersave support
2845 *
2846 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2847 *
2848 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2849 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2850 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2851 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2852 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2853 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2854 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2855 * it finds traffic directed to it.
2856 *
2857 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2858 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2859 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
2860 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2861 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2862 *
2863 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2864 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2865 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2866 *
2867 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2868 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2869 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2870 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2871 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2872 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2873 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
2874 *
2875 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2876 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2877 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2878 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2879 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2880 * periods.
2881 *
2882 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2883 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2884 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2885 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2886 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2887 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2888 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2889 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2890 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2891 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2892 *
2893 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2894 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2895 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2896 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2897 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2898 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2899 *
2900 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2901 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2902 */
2903
2904/**
2905 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2906 *
2907 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2908 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2909 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2910 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2911 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2912 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2913 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2914 *
2915 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2916 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2917 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2918 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2919 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2920 *
2921 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2922 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2923 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2924 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2925 *
2926 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2927 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2928 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2929 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2930 *
2931 *  - a list of information element IDs
2932 *  - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2933 *
2934 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2935 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2936 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2937 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2938 * vendor information elements.
2939 *
2940 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2941 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2942 *
2943 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2944 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2945 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2946 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2947 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2948 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2949 *
2950 *
2951 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2952 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2953 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2954 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2955 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2956 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2957 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2958 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2959 *
2960 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2961 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2962 * signal strength threshold checking.
2963 */
2964
2965/**
2966 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2967 *
2968 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2969 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2970 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2971 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2972 *
2973 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2974 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2975 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2976 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2977 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2978 * hardware flags.
2979 *
2980 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2981 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2982 * turned off otherwise.
2983 *
2984 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2985 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2986 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2987 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2988 */
2989
2990/**
2991 * DOC: Frame filtering
2992 *
2993 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2994 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2995 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2996 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2997 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2998 *
2999 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
3000 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
3001 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
3002 *
3003 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
3004 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
3005 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
3006 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
3007 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
3008 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
3009 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
3010 *
3011 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
3012 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
3013 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
3014 * or dropped.
3015 *
3016 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
3017 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
3018 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
3019 * the flag, but not clear it.
3020 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
3021 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
3022 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
3023 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
3024 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
3025 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
3026 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
3027 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
3028 */
3029
3030/**
3031 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
3032 *
3033 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
3034 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
3035 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
3036 *
3037 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
3038 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
3039 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
3040 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
3041 * the driver code.
3042 *
3043 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
3044 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
3045 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
3046 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
3047 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
3048 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
3049 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
3050 *
3051 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
3052 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
3053 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
3054 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
3055 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
3056 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
3057 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
3058 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
3059 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
3060 * @sta_notify callback.
3061 *
3062 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
3063 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
3064 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
3065 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
3066 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
3067 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
3068 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
3069 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
3070 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
3071 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
3072 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
3073 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
3074 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
3075 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
3076 *
3077 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
3078 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
3079 *
3080 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
3081 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
3082 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
3083 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
3084 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
3085 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
3086 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
3087 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
3088 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
3089 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
3090 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
3091 *
3092 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
3093 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
3094 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
3095 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
3096 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
3097 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
3098 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
3099 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
3100 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
3101 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
3102 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
3103 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
3104 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
3105 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
3106 *
3107 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
3108 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
3109 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
3110 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
3111 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
3112 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
3113 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
3114 *
3115 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
3116 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
3117 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
3118 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
3119 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
3120 *
3121 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
3122 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
3123 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
3124 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
3125 */
3126
3127/**
3128 * DOC: HW queue control
3129 *
3130 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
3131 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
3132 * was problematic for a few reasons:
3133 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
3134 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
3135 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
3136 *
3137 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
3138 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
3139 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
3140 *
3141 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
3142 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
3143 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3144 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3145 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3146 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3147 * the hardware queue.
3148 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3149 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3150 *
3151 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
3152 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3153 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3154 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3155 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3156 *
3157 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3158 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3159 * after-DTIM queue for AP:   8
3160 * off-channel queue:         9
3161 *
3162 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3163 *   hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3164 *
3165 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3166 *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3167 *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3168 *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3169 *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3170 *   vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3171 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3172 *
3173 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3174 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3175 *
3176 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3177 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3178 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3179 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3180 */
3181
3182/**
3183 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3184 *
3185 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3186 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3187 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3188 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3189 *
3190 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3191 *      by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3192 *      multicast address.
3193 *
3194 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3195 *      %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3196 *
3197 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3198 *      the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3199 *
3200 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3201 *      to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3202 *      by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3203 *      mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3204 *      honour this flag if possible.
3205 *
3206 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3207 *      station
3208 *
3209 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3210 *
3211 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3212 *
3213 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3214 *
3215 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames
3216 */
3217enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3218        FIF_ALLMULTI            = 1<<1,
3219        FIF_FCSFAIL             = 1<<2,
3220        FIF_PLCPFAIL            = 1<<3,
3221        FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
3222        FIF_CONTROL             = 1<<5,
3223        FIF_OTHER_BSS           = 1<<6,
3224        FIF_PSPOLL              = 1<<7,
3225        FIF_PROBE_REQ           = 1<<8,
3226        FIF_MCAST_ACTION        = 1<<9,
3227};
3228
3229/**
3230 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3231 *
3232 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3233 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3234 *
3235 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3236 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3237 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3238 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3239 *
3240 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3241 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3242 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either
3243 *      call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or
3244 *      call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status
3245 *      %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after
3246 *      ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special
3247 *      status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE.
3248 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3249 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3250 *      queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3251 *      driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3252 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3253 *      called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3254 *      ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3255 *      session is gone and removes the station.
3256 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3257 *      but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3258 *      now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3259 *      should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3260 */
3261enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3262        IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3263        IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3264        IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3265        IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3266        IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3267        IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3268        IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3269};
3270
3271#define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1
3272#define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2
3273
3274/**
3275 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3276 *
3277 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3278 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3279 * @tid: tid of the BA session
3280 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3281 *      action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3282 *      actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3283 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size  (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3284 *      action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3285 *      %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3286 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3287 *      valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3288 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3289 *      %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3290 */
3291struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3292        enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3293        struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3294        u16 tid;
3295        u16 ssn;
3296        u16 buf_size;
3297        bool amsdu;
3298        u16 timeout;
3299};
3300
3301/**
3302 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3303 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3304 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3305 *      frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3306 */
3307enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3308        IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3309        IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3310};
3311
3312/**
3313 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3314 *
3315 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3316 *      to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3317 *      information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3318 *      flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3319 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3320 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3321 *      changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3322 *      the peer.
3323 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3324 *      by the peer
3325 */
3326enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3327        IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED         = BIT(0),
3328        IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED       = BIT(1),
3329        IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
3330        IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED        = BIT(3),
3331};
3332
3333/**
3334 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3335 *
3336 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3337 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3338 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
3339 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3340 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3341 *
3342 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3343 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3344 *      for sending managment frames offchannel.
3345 */
3346enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3347        IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3348        IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3349};
3350
3351/**
3352 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type
3353 *
3354 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3355 * reconfiguration type was completed.
3356 *
3357 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3358 *      (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3359 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3360 *      of wowlan configuration)
3361 */
3362enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3363        IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3364        IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3365};
3366
3367/**
3368 * struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info - prepare TX information
3369 * @duration: if non-zero, hint about the required duration,
3370 *      only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method.
3371 * @subtype: frame subtype (auth, (re)assoc, deauth, disassoc)
3372 * @success: whether the frame exchange was successful, only
3373 *      used with the mgd_complete_tx() method, and then only
3374 *      valid for auth and (re)assoc.
3375 */
3376struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info {
3377        u16 duration;
3378        u16 subtype;
3379        u8 success:1;
3380};
3381
3382/**
3383 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3384 *
3385 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3386 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3387 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3388 *
3389 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3390 *      skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3391 *      The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3392 *      configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3393 *      preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3394 *      Must be atomic.
3395 *
3396 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3397 *      is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3398 *      frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3399 *      Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3400 *      or zero.
3401 *      When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3402 *      to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3403 *      is added.
3404 *      Must be implemented and can sleep.
3405 *
3406 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3407 *      is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3408 *      it must turn off frame reception.)
3409 *      May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3410 *      an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3411 *      you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3412 *      Must be implemented and can sleep.
3413 *
3414 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3415 *      stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3416 *      ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3417 *      configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3418 *      reconfigured at resume time.
3419 *      The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3420 *      wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3421 *      supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3422 *      must return 1 from this function.
3423 *
3424 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3425 *      now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3426 *      functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3427 *      to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3428 *      will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3429 *
3430 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3431 *      modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3432 *      supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3433 *      in suspend().
3434 *
3435 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3436 *      enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3437 *      and @stop must be implemented.
3438 *      The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3439 *      the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3440 *      interface is given in the conf parameter.
3441 *      The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3442 *      negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3443 *      Must be implemented and can sleep.
3444 *
3445 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3446 *      is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3447 *      switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3448 *      Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3449 *      found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3450 *
3451 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3452 *      The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3453 *      and no monitor interfaces are present.
3454 *      When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3455 *      must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3456 *      the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3457 *      MAC address of the device going away.
3458 *      Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3459 *
3460 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3461 *      function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3462 *      This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3463 *      if it does. The callback can sleep.
3464 *
3465 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3466 *      parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3467 *      level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3468 *      This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3469 *      for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3470 *      of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3471 *      can sleep.
3472 *
3473 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3474 *      This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3475 *      to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3476 *
3477 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3478 *      See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3479 *      This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3480 *
3481 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3482 *      This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3483 *      should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3484 *      of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3485 *      which flags are changed.
3486 *      This callback can sleep.
3487 *
3488 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3489 *      must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3490 *
3491 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3492 *      This callback is only called between add_interface and
3493 *      remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3494 *      is enabled.
3495 *      Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3496 *      The callback can sleep.
3497 *
3498 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3499 *      This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3500 *      which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3501 *      The callback must be atomic.
3502 *
3503 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3504 *      host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3505 *      necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3506 *      After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3507 *      userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3508 *
3509 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3510 *      WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3511 *      offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3512 *
3513 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3514 *      the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3515 *      configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3516 *      registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3517 *      that power save is disabled.
3518 *      The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3519 *      entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3520 *      at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3521 *      (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3522 *      When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3523 *      note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3524 *      any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3525 *      This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3526 *      this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3527 *      software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3528 *      capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3529 *      advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3530 *      The callback can sleep.
3531 *
3532 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3533 *      The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3534 *      but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3535 *      ieee80211_scan_completed().
3536 *      This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3537 *      scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3538 *      The callback can sleep.
3539 *
3540 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3541 *      specific intervals.  The driver must call the
3542 *      ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3543 *      This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3544 *
3545 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3546 *      In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3547 *
3548 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3549 *      is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3550 *      The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3551 *      the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3552 *      can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3553 *
3554 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3555 *      software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3556 *      this notification.
3557 *      The callback can sleep.
3558 *
3559 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3560 *      Returns zero if statistics are available.
3561 *      The callback can sleep.
3562 *
3563 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3564 *      IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3565 *      IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3566 *      The callback must be atomic.
3567 *
3568 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3569 *      if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3570 *      stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3571 *      should be set as well.
3572 *      The callback can sleep.
3573 *
3574 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3575 *      The callback can sleep.
3576 *
3577 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3578 *      AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3579 *
3580 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3581 *      station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3582 *      returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3583 *      no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3584 *      the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3585 *      This callback can sleep.
3586 *
3587 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3588 *      when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3589 *      should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3590 *      callback can sleep.
3591 *
3592 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3593 *      associated station, AP,  IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3594 *      in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3595 *      %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3596 *
3597 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx
3598 *      power for the station.
3599 *      This callback can sleep.
3600 *
3601 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3602 *      station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3603 *      This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3604 *      It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3605 *      up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3606 *      isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3607 *      period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3608 *      See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3609 *      The callback can sleep.
3610 *
3611 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3612 *      synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3613 *      pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3614 *      the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3615 *      in @sta_state.
3616 *      The callback can sleep.
3617 *
3618 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3619 *      used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3620 *      from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3621 *      in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3622 *      uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3623 *      otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3624 *      Must be atomic.
3625 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3626 *      is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3627 *      the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3628 *
3629 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3630 *      filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3631 *      let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3632 *      the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3633 *      all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3634 *      Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3635 *      The callback can sleep.
3636 *
3637 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3638 *      bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3639 *      Returns a negative error code on failure.
3640 *      The callback can sleep.
3641 *
3642 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3643 *      this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3644 *      required function.
3645 *      The callback can sleep.
3646 *
3647 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3648 *      Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3649 *      required function.
3650 *      The callback can sleep.
3651 *
3652 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3653 *      firmware/hardware.  Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3654 *      calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3655 *      as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3656 *      The callback can sleep.
3657 *
3658 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3659 *      with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3660 *      function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3661 *      TSF synchronization.
3662 *      The callback can sleep.
3663 *
3664 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3665 *      This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3666 *      used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3667 *      Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3668 *      The callback can sleep.
3669 *
3670 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3671 *
3672 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3673 *      need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3674 *      and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3675 *      The callback can sleep.
3676 *
3677 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3678 *      in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3679 *      accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3680 *      estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3681 *      coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3682 *
3683 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3684 *      be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3685 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3686 *
3687 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3688 *      that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3689 *      of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3690 *      use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3691 *      If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3692 *      Note that vif can be NULL.
3693 *      The callback can sleep.
3694 *
3695 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3696 *      switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3697 *      callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3698 *      completion of the channel switch.
3699 *
3700 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3701 *      Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3702 *      reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3703 *      (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3704 *
3705 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3706 *
3707 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3708 *      call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3709 *      that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3710 *      offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3711 *      normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3712 *      duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3713 *      ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3714 *      Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3715 *      must be accepted in this case.
3716 *      This callback may sleep.
3717 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3718 *      aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3719 *
3720 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3721 *
3722 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3723 *
3724 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3725 *      queues before entering power save.
3726 *
3727 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3728 *      when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3729 *      The callback can sleep.
3730 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3731 *      &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3732 *      The callback must be atomic.
3733 *
3734 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3735 *      parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3736 *      sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3737 *      to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3738 *      Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3739 *      if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3740 *      the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3741 *      the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3742 *      more-data bit must always be set.
3743 *      The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3744 *      from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3745 *      In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3746 *      @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3747 *      this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3748 *      on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3749 *      period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3750 *      responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3751 *      In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3752 *      bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3753 *      at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3754 *      setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3755 *      service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3756 *      on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3757 *      ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3758 *      This callback must be atomic.
3759 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3760 *      to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3761 *      via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3762 *      released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3763 *      and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3764 *      frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3765 *      them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3766 *      on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3767 *      bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3768 *      ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3769 *      The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3770 *      frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3771 *      This callback must be atomic.
3772 *
3773 * @get_et_sset_count:  Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3774 *
3775 * @get_et_stats:  Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3776 *
3777 * @get_et_strings:  Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3778 *      and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3779 *
3780 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3781 *      before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3782 *      bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3783 *      yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3784 *      transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3785 *      powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3786 *      management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3787 *      driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3788 *      and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3789 *      For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3790 *      would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3791 *      frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3792 *      The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3793 *      mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3794 *      Additional information is passed in the &struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info
3795 *      data. If duration there is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the
3796 *      driver the duration for which the operation is requested.
3797 *      The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3798 * @mgd_complete_tx: Notify the driver that the response frame for a previously
3799 *      transmitted frame announced with @mgd_prepare_tx was received, the data
3800 *      is filled similarly to @mgd_prepare_tx though the duration is not used.
3801 *
3802 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3803 *      a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3804 *      channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3805 *      setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3806 *      mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3807 *      discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3808 *      2 * (DTIM period).
3809 *      The callback is optional and can sleep.
3810 *
3811 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3812 *      This callback may sleep.
3813 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3814 *      This callback may sleep.
3815 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3816 *      may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3817 *      channel context with different settings
3818 *      This callback may sleep.
3819 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3820 *      to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3821 *      This callback may sleep.
3822 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3823 *      unbound from vif.
3824 *      This callback may sleep.
3825 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3826 *      another, as specified in the list of
3827 *      @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3828 *      to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3829 *      This callback may sleep.
3830 *
3831 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3832 *      information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3833 *      context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3834 *      software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3835 *      just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3836 *      disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3837 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3838 *
3839 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3840 *      during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3841 *      This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3842 *      indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3843 *      This callback may sleep.
3844 *
3845 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3846 *      Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3847 *      This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3848 *
3849 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3850 *      Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3851 *      function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3852 *      decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3853 *      ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3854 *      get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3855 *      1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3856 *      transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3857 *      If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3858 *      since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3859 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3860 *      before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3861 *      gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3862 *      the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3863 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3864 *      after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3865 *      driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3866 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3867 *      when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
3868 *      driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3869 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
3870 *      when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
3871 *      CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
3872 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3873 *      information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3874 *      channel context is bound before this is called.
3875 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3876 *
3877 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3878 *      specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3879 *      if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3880 *
3881 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3882 *      and hardware limits.
3883 *
3884 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3885 *      is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3886 *      and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3887 *      driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3888 *      the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3889 *      The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3890 *      optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3891 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3892 *      peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3893 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3894 *      response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3895 *      parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3896 *      an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3897 *      response template is provided, together with the location of the
3898 *      switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3899 *      the function call.
3900 *
3901 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3902 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3903 *      synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3904 *      pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3905 *      currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3906 *
3907 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3908 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3909 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3910 *      contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3911 *      are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3912 *      The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3913 *      some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3914 *      changed parameters.
3915 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3916 *      cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3917 *      this call.
3918 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3919 *      ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3920 *      NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
3921 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
3922 *      aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
3923 *      between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
3924 *      skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
3925 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
3926 *      Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
3927 *
3928 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
3929 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
3930 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep.
3931 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer.
3932 *      This callback may sleep.
3933 * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags
3934 *      This callback may sleep.
3935 * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using
3936 *      4-address mode
3937 * @set_sar_specs: Update the SAR (TX power) settings.
3938 * @sta_set_decap_offload: Called to notify the driver when a station is allowed
3939 *      to use rx decapsulation offload
3940 * @add_twt_setup: Update hw with TWT agreement parameters received from the peer.
3941 *      This callback allows the hw to check if requested parameters
3942 *      are supported and if there is enough room for a new agreement.
3943 *      The hw is expected to set agreement result in the req_type field of
3944 *      twt structure.
3945 * @twt_teardown_request: Update the hw with TWT teardown request received
3946 *      from the peer.
3947 */
3948struct ieee80211_ops {
3949        void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3950                   struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3951                   struct sk_buff *skb);
3952        int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3953        void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3954#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3955        int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3956        int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3957        void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
3958#endif
3959        int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3960                             struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3961        int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3962                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3963                                enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
3964        void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3965                                 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3966        int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
3967        void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3968                                 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3969                                 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3970                                 u32 changed);
3971
3972        int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3973        void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3974
3975        u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3976                                 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
3977        void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3978                                 unsigned int changed_flags,
3979                                 unsigned int *total_flags,
3980                                 u64 multicast);
3981        void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3982                                    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3983                                    unsigned int filter_flags,
3984                                    unsigned int changed_flags);
3985        int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3986                       bool set);
3987        int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
3988                       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3989                       struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
3990        void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3991                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3992                                struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3993                                struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3994                                u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
3995        void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3996                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3997                               struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
3998        void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3999                                        struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
4000        int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4001                       struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
4002        void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4003                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4004        int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4005                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4006                                struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
4007                                struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
4008        int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4009                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4010        void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4011                              struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4012                              const u8 *mac_addr);
4013        void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4014                                 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4015        int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4016                         struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
4017        void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4018                            struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4019                            struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4020        int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
4021        int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
4022        int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4023                       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4024        int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4025                          struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4026#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
4027        void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4028                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4029                                struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4030                                struct dentry *dir);
4031#endif
4032        void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4033                        enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4034        int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4035                             struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4036                             struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4037        int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4038                         struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4039                         enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
4040                         enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
4041        void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4042                                   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4043                                   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4044        void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4045                              struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4046                              struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4047                              u32 changed);
4048        void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4049                                    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4050                                    struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4051        void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4052                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4053                               struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4054                               struct station_info *sinfo);
4055        int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4056                       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
4057                       const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
4058        u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4059        void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4060                        u64 tsf);
4061        void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4062                           s64 offset);
4063        void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4064        int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4065
4066        /**
4067         * @ampdu_action:
4068         * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
4069         * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
4070         * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
4071         * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
4072         * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
4073         * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
4074         * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
4075         * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
4076         * possible with a buf_size of 8:
4077         *
4078         * - ``TX: 1.....7``
4079         * - ``RX:  2....7`` (lost frame #1)
4080         * - ``TX:        8..1...``
4081         *
4082         * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
4083         * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
4084         *
4085         * - ``TX:        1   or``
4086         * - ``TX:        18  or``
4087         * - ``TX:        81``
4088         *
4089         * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
4090         *
4091         * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return
4092         * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START
4093         * if the session can start immediately.
4094         *
4095         * The callback can sleep.
4096         */
4097        int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4098                            struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4099                            struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
4100        int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
4101                struct survey_info *survey);
4102        void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4103        void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
4104#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
4105        int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4106                            void *data, int len);
4107        int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
4108                             struct netlink_callback *cb,
4109                             void *data, int len);
4110#endif
4111        void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4112                      u32 queues, bool drop);
4113        void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4114                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4115                               struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4116        int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
4117        int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
4118
4119        int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4120                                 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4121                                 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
4122                                 int duration,
4123                                 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
4124        int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4125                                        struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4126        int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
4127        void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4128                              u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
4129        bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4130        int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4131                                const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
4132        void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4133                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4134                               const struct ieee80211_event *event);
4135
4136        void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4137                                      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4138                                      u16 tids, int num_frames,
4139                                      enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4140                                      bool more_data);
4141        void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4142                                        struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4143                                        u16 tids, int num_frames,
4144                                        enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4145                                        bool more_data);
4146
4147        int     (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4148                                     struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
4149        void    (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4150                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4151                                struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
4152        void    (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4153                                  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4154                                  u32 sset, u8 *data);
4155
4156        void    (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4157                                  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4158                                  struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info);
4159        void    (*mgd_complete_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4160                                   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4161                                   struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info);
4162
4163        void    (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4164                                             struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4165
4166        int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4167                           struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4168        void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4169                               struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4170        void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4171                               struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
4172                               u32 changed);
4173        int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4174                                  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4175                                  struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4176        void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4177                                     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4178                                     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4179        int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4180                                  struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
4181                                  int n_vifs,
4182                                  enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
4183
4184        void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4185                                  enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
4186
4187#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
4188        void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4189                                 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4190                                 struct inet6_dev *idev);
4191#endif
4192        void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4193                                      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4194                                      struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4195        int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4196                                  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4197                                  struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4198
4199        int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4200                                   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4201        void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4202                                     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4203        void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4204                                         struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4205                                         struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4206
4207        int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4208        void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4209        u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4210                                       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4211        int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4212                           int *dbm);
4213
4214        int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4215                                   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4216                                   struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4217                                   struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4218                                   struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4219        void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4220                                           struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4221                                           struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4222        void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4223                                         struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4224                                         struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4225
4226        void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4227                              struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4228        void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4229
4230        int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4231                         struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4232                         struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4233        int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4234                        struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4235        int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4236                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4237                               struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4238        int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4239                            struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4240                            const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4241        void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4242                            struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4243                            u8 instance_id);
4244        bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4245                                       struct sk_buff *head,
4246                                       struct sk_buff *skb);
4247        int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4248                                       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4249                                       struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4250        int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4251                          struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4252        void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4253                           struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4254        int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4255                              struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4256                              struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4257                              struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf);
4258        int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4259                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4260                                struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids);
4261        void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4262                                   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4263        void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4264                              struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4265        int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4266                             const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar);
4267        void (*sta_set_decap_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4268                                      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4269                                      struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4270        void (*add_twt_setup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4271                              struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4272                              struct ieee80211_twt_setup *twt);
4273        void (*twt_teardown_request)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4274                                     struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 flowid);
4275};
4276
4277/**
4278 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4279 *
4280 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4281 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4282 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4283 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4284 * @priv_data_len.
4285 *
4286 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4287 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4288 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4289 *      NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4290 *
4291 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4292 */
4293struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4294                                           const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4295                                           const char *requested_name);
4296
4297/**
4298 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4299 *
4300 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4301 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4302 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4303 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4304 * @priv_data_len.
4305 *
4306 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4307 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4308 *
4309 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4310 */
4311static inline
4312struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4313                                        const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4314{
4315        return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4316}
4317
4318/**
4319 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4320 *
4321 * You must call this function before any other functions in
4322 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4323 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4324 *
4325 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4326 *
4327 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4328 */
4329int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4330
4331/**
4332 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4333 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4334 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4335 *      (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4336 */
4337struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4338        int throughput;
4339        int blink_time;
4340};
4341
4342/**
4343 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4344 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4345 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4346 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4347 *      interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4348 */
4349enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4350        IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO          = BIT(0),
4351        IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK           = BIT(1),
4352        IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED      = BIT(2),
4353};
4354
4355#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4356const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4357const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4358const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4359const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4360const char *
4361__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4362                                   unsigned int flags,
4363                                   const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4364                                   unsigned int blink_table_len);
4365#endif
4366/**
4367 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4368 *
4369 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4370 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4371 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4372 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4373 *
4374 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4375 *
4376 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4377 */
4378static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4379{
4380#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4381        return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4382#else
4383        return NULL;
4384#endif
4385}
4386
4387/**
4388 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4389 *
4390 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4391 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4392 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4393 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4394 *
4395 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4396 *
4397 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4398 */
4399static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4400{
4401#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4402        return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4403#else
4404        return NULL;
4405#endif
4406}
4407
4408/**
4409 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4410 *
4411 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4412 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4413 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4414 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4415 *
4416 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4417 *
4418 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4419 */
4420static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4421{
4422#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4423        return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4424#else
4425        return NULL;
4426#endif
4427}
4428
4429/**
4430 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4431 *
4432 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4433 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4434 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4435 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4436 *
4437 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4438 *
4439 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4440 */
4441static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4442{
4443#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4444        return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4445#else
4446        return NULL;
4447#endif
4448}
4449
4450/**
4451 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4452 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4453 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4454 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4455 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4456 *
4457 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4458 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4459 *
4460 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4461 */
4462static inline const char *
4463ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4464                                 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4465                                 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4466{
4467#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4468        return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4469                                                  blink_table_len);
4470#else
4471        return NULL;
4472#endif
4473}
4474
4475/**
4476 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4477 *
4478 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4479 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4480 *
4481 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4482 */
4483void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4484
4485/**
4486 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4487 *
4488 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4489 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4490 * before calling this function.
4491 *
4492 * @hw: the hardware to free
4493 */
4494void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4495
4496/**
4497 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4498 *
4499 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4500 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4501 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4502 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4503 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4504 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4505 *
4506 * @hw: the hardware to restart
4507 */
4508void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4509
4510/**
4511 * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list
4512 *
4513 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4514 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4515 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4516 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4517 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4518 *
4519 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4520 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4521 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4522 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4523 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4524 *
4525 * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock
4526 *
4527 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4528 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4529 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4530 * @list: the destination list
4531 */
4532void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4533                       struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list);
4534
4535/**
4536 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4537 *
4538 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4539 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4540 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4541 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4542 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4543 *
4544 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4545 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4546 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4547 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4548 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4549 *
4550 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4551 *
4552 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4553 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4554 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4555 * @napi: the NAPI context
4556 */
4557void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4558                       struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4559
4560/**
4561 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4562 *
4563 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4564 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4565 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4566 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4567 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4568 *
4569 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4570 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4571 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4572 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4573 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4574 *
4575 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4576 *
4577 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4578 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4579 */
4580static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4581{
4582        ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4583}
4584
4585/**
4586 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4587 *
4588 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4589 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4590 *
4591 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4592 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4593 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4594 *
4595 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4596 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4597 */
4598void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4599
4600/**
4601 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4602 *
4603 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4604 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4605 *
4606 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4607 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4608 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4609 *
4610 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4611 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4612 */
4613static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4614                                   struct sk_buff *skb)
4615{
4616        local_bh_disable();
4617        ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4618        local_bh_enable();
4619}
4620
4621/**
4622 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4623 *
4624 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4625 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4626 * entering/leaving PS mode.
4627 *
4628 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4629 *
4630 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4631 * each other.
4632 *
4633 * @sta: currently connected sta
4634 * @start: start or stop PS
4635 *
4636 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4637 */
4638int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4639
4640/**
4641 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4642 *                                  (in process context)
4643 *
4644 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4645 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4646 * applies.
4647 *
4648 * @sta: currently connected sta
4649 * @start: start or stop PS
4650 *
4651 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4652 */
4653static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4654                                                  bool start)
4655{
4656        int ret;
4657
4658        local_bh_disable();
4659        ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4660        local_bh_enable();
4661
4662        return ret;
4663}
4664
4665/**
4666 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4667 * @sta: currently connected station
4668 *
4669 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4670 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4671 * connected station was received.
4672 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4673 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4674 * be serialized.
4675 */
4676void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4677
4678/**
4679 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4680 * @sta: currently connected station
4681 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4682 *
4683 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4684 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4685 * from a connected station was received.
4686 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4687 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4688 * serialized.
4689 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4690 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4691 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4692 * checks.
4693 */
4694void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4695
4696/*
4697 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4698 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4699 */
4700#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM    ALIGN(14, 4)
4701
4702/**
4703 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4704 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4705 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4706 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4707 *
4708 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4709 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4710 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4711 *
4712 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4713 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4714 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4715 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4716 *
4717 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4718 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4719 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4720 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4721 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4722 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4723 *
4724 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4725 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4726 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4727 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4728 * use this API.
4729 */
4730void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4731                                u8 tid, bool buffered);
4732
4733/**
4734 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4735 *
4736 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4737 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4738 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4739 *
4740 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4741 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4742 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4743 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4744 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4745 */
4746void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4747                            struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4748                            struct sk_buff *skb,
4749                            struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4750                            int max_rates);
4751
4752/**
4753 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4754 *
4755 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4756 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4757 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4758 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4759 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4760 * slow stations to starve).
4761 *
4762 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4763 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4764 */
4765void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4766                                           u32 thr);
4767
4768/**
4769 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
4770 *
4771 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
4772 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
4773 * in updating the tx rate in data path.
4774 *
4775 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4776 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
4777 * @info: tx status information
4778 */
4779void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4780                              struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4781                              struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4782
4783/**
4784 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4785 *
4786 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4787 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4788 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4789 *
4790 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4791 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4792 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4793 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4794 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4795 *
4796 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4797 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4798 */
4799void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4800                         struct sk_buff *skb);
4801
4802/**
4803 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4804 *
4805 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4806 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4807 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4808 *
4809 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4810 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4811 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4812 *
4813 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4814 * @status: tx status information
4815 */
4816void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4817                             struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4818
4819/**
4820 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4821 *
4822 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4823 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4824 * specific skbs.
4825 *
4826 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4827 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4828 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4829 *
4830 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4831 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4832 *      (NULL for multicast packets)
4833 * @info: tx status information
4834 */
4835static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4836                                             struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4837                                             struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4838{
4839        struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4840                .sta = sta,
4841                .info = info,
4842        };
4843
4844        ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4845}
4846
4847/**
4848 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4849 *
4850 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4851 *
4852 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4853 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4854 * for a single hardware.
4855 *
4856 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4857 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4858 */
4859static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4860                                          struct sk_buff *skb)
4861{
4862        local_bh_disable();
4863        ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4864        local_bh_enable();
4865}
4866
4867/**
4868 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4869 *
4870 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4871 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4872 *
4873 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4874 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4875 *
4876 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4877 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4878 */
4879void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4880                                 struct sk_buff *skb);
4881
4882/**
4883 * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format
4884 *
4885 * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit
4886 * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which
4887 * are are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap
4888 * 802.11 frames.
4889 *
4890 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4891 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all
4892 * calls in the same tx status family.
4893 *
4894 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4895 * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted
4896 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4897 */
4898void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4899                               struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4900                               struct sk_buff *skb);
4901
4902/**
4903 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4904 *
4905 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4906 * connected STA.
4907 *
4908 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4909 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4910 */
4911void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4912
4913#define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4914
4915/**
4916 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4917 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4918 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
4919 * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4920 *      to countdown counters.  This array can contain zero values which
4921 *      should be ignored.
4922 */
4923struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4924        u16 tim_offset;
4925        u16 tim_length;
4926
4927        u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM];
4928};
4929
4930/**
4931 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4932 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4933 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4934 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4935 *      receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4936 *
4937 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4938 * obtain the beacon template.
4939 *
4940 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4941 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
4942 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4943 * applicable, the CSA count.
4944 *
4945 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4946 *
4947 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4948 */
4949struct sk_buff *
4950ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4951                              struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4952                              struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4953
4954/**
4955 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4956 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4957 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4958 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4959 *      Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4960 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4961 *      (including the ID and length bytes!).
4962 *      Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4963 *
4964 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4965 * obtain the beacon frame.
4966 *
4967 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4968 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
4969 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4970 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
4971 *
4972 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4973 *
4974 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4975 */
4976struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4977                                         struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4978                                         u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4979
4980/**
4981 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4982 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4983 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4984 *
4985 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4986 *
4987 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4988 */
4989static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4990                                                   struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4991{
4992        return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4993}
4994
4995/**
4996 * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown
4997 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4998 *
4999 * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
5000 * This function is called implicitly when
5001 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
5002 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
5003 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown.
5004 *
5005 * Return: new countdown value
5006 */
5007u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5008
5009/**
5010 * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown
5011 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5012 * @counter: the new value for the counter
5013 *
5014 * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be
5015 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
5016 *
5017 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(),
5018 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
5019 */
5020void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
5021
5022/**
5023 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
5024 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5025 *
5026 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
5027 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
5028 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
5029 */
5030void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5031
5032/**
5033 * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1
5034 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5035 *
5036 * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero.
5037 */
5038bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5039
5040/**
5041 * ieee80211_color_change_finish - notify mac80211 about color change
5042 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5043 *
5044 * After a color change announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
5045 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
5046 * notify mac80211 that the color can be changed
5047 */
5048void ieee80211_color_change_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5049
5050/**
5051 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
5052 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5053 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5054 *
5055 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5056 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
5057 *
5058 * Can only be called in AP mode.
5059 *
5060 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
5061 */
5062struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5063                                        struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5064
5065/**
5066 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
5067 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5068 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5069 *
5070 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
5071 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5072 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
5073 *
5074 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5075 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
5076 *
5077 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
5078 */
5079struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5080                                     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5081
5082/**
5083 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
5084 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5085 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5086 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
5087 *      if at all possible
5088 *
5089 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
5090 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5091 * BSSID and address is used.
5092 *
5093 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
5094 * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
5095 *
5096 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5097 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
5098 *
5099 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
5100 */
5101struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5102                                       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5103                                       bool qos_ok);
5104
5105/**
5106 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5107 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5108 * @src_addr: source MAC address
5109 * @ssid: SSID buffer
5110 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
5111 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
5112 *
5113 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5114 * hardware.
5115 *
5116 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5117 */
5118struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5119                                       const u8 *src_addr,
5120                                       const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
5121                                       size_t tailroom);
5122
5123/**
5124 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
5125 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5126 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5127 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5128 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5129 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5130 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
5131 *
5132 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5133 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5134 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5135 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
5136 */
5137void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5138                       const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5139                       const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5140                       struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
5141
5142/**
5143 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
5144 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5145 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5146 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5147 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5148 *
5149 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5150 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5151 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5152 *
5153 * Return: The duration.
5154 */
5155__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5156                              struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
5157                              const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5158
5159/**
5160 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
5161 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5162 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5163 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5164 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5165 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5166 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
5167 *
5168 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5169 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5170 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5171 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
5172 */
5173void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5174                             struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5175                             const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5176                             const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5177                             struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
5178
5179/**
5180 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
5181 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5182 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5183 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5184 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5185 *
5186 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5187 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5188 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5189 *
5190 * Return: The duration.
5191 */
5192__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5193                                    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5194                                    size_t frame_len,
5195                                    const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5196
5197/**
5198 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
5199 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5200 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5201 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
5202 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
5203 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
5204 *
5205 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
5206 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
5207 *
5208 * Return: The duration.
5209 */
5210__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5211                                        struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5212                                        enum nl80211_band band,
5213                                        size_t frame_len,
5214                                        struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
5215
5216/**
5217 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
5218 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5219 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5220 *
5221 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
5222 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
5223 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
5224 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
5225 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
5226 *
5227 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
5228 * frames are available.
5229 *
5230 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
5231 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
5232 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
5233 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
5234 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
5235 * use common code for all beacons.
5236 */
5237struct sk_buff *
5238ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5239
5240/**
5241 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
5242 *
5243 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
5244 *
5245 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5246 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5247 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5248 */
5249void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5250                               u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5251
5252/**
5253 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
5254 *
5255 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
5256 * from the given packet.
5257 *
5258 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5259 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
5260 *      with this P1K
5261 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5262 */
5263static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5264                                          struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
5265{
5266        struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
5267        const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
5268        u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
5269
5270        ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
5271}
5272
5273/**
5274 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
5275 *
5276 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5277 * and transmitter address.
5278 *
5279 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5280 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5281 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5282 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5283 */
5284void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5285                               const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5286
5287/**
5288 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5289 *
5290 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5291 * in the packet.
5292 *
5293 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5294 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5295 *      encrypted with this key
5296 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5297 */
5298void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5299                            struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5300
5301/**
5302 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5303 *
5304 * @pos: start of crypto header
5305 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5306 * @pn: PN to add
5307 *
5308 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5309 * the packet payload)
5310 *
5311 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5312 * point to the crypto header)
5313 */
5314u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5315
5316/**
5317 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5318 *
5319 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5320 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5321 *      the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5322 *      CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5323 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5324 *
5325 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5326 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5327 * by the device and not by mac80211.
5328 *
5329 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5330 * can be done concurrently.
5331 */
5332void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5333                              int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5334
5335/**
5336 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5337 *
5338 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5339 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5340 *      the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5341 *      CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5342 * @seq: new sequence data
5343 *
5344 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5345 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5346 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5347 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5348 *
5349 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5350 * can be done concurrently.
5351 */
5352void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5353                              int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5354
5355/**
5356 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5357 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5358 *
5359 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5360 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5361 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5362 *
5363 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5364 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5365 */
5366void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5367
5368/**
5369 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5370 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5371 * @keyconf: new key data
5372 *
5373 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5374 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5375 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5376 *
5377 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5378 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5379 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5380 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5381 *
5382 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5383 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5384 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5385 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5386 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5387 * of the reconfiguration.
5388 *
5389 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5390 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5391 *
5392 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5393 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5394 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5395 * the key that's being replaced.
5396 */
5397struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5398ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5399                        struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5400
5401/**
5402 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5403 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5404 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5405 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5406 * @gfp: allocation flags
5407 */
5408void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5409                                const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5410
5411/**
5412 * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key
5413 *
5414 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5415 * at the same time.
5416 *
5417 * @keyconf: the key in question
5418 */
5419void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5420
5421/**
5422 * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key
5423 *
5424 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5425 * at the same time.
5426 *
5427 * @keyconf: the key in question
5428 */
5429void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5430
5431/**
5432 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5433 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5434 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5435 *
5436 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5437 */
5438void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5439
5440/**
5441 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5442 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5443 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5444 *
5445 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5446 */
5447void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5448
5449/**
5450 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5451 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5452 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5453 *
5454 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5455 *
5456 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5457 */
5458
5459int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5460
5461/**
5462 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5463 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5464 *
5465 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5466 */
5467void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5468
5469/**
5470 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5471 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5472 *
5473 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5474 */
5475void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5476
5477/**
5478 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5479 *
5480 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5481 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5482 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5483 * any context, including hardirq context.
5484 *
5485 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5486 * @info: information about the completed scan
5487 */
5488void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5489                              struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5490
5491/**
5492 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5493 *
5494 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5495 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5496 *
5497 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5498 */
5499void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5500
5501/**
5502 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5503 *
5504 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5505 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5506 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5507 * while associating, for instance.
5508 *
5509 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5510 */
5511void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5512
5513/**
5514 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5515 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5516 *      been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5517 *      reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5518 *      interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5519 *      haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5520 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5521 *      interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5522 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5523 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA
5524 *      is not in the driver.  This may fix crashes during firmware recovery
5525 *      for instance.
5526 */
5527enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5528        IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL     = 0,
5529        IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
5530        IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE     = BIT(1),
5531        IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER        = BIT(2),
5532};
5533
5534/**
5535 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5536 *
5537 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5538 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5539 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5540 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5541 *
5542 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5543 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5544 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5545 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5546 */
5547void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5548                                  void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5549                                                   struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5550                                  void *data);
5551
5552/**
5553 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5554 *
5555 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5556 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5557 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5558 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5559 * be used.
5560 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5561 *
5562 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5563 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5564 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5565 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5566 */
5567static inline void
5568ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5569                                    void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5570                                                     struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5571                                    void *data)
5572{
5573        ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5574                                     iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5575                                     iterator, data);
5576}
5577
5578/**
5579 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5580 *
5581 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5582 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5583 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5584 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5585 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5586 *
5587 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5588 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5589 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5590 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5591 */
5592void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5593                                                u32 iter_flags,
5594                                                void (*iterator)(void *data,
5595                                                    u8 *mac,
5596                                                    struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5597                                                void *data);
5598
5599/**
5600 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx - iterate active interfaces
5601 *
5602 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5603 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5604 * This version can only be used while holding the wiphy mutex.
5605 *
5606 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5607 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5608 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5609 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5610 */
5611void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5612                                             u32 iter_flags,
5613                                             void (*iterator)(void *data,
5614                                                u8 *mac,
5615                                                struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5616                                             void *data);
5617
5618/**
5619 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5620 *
5621 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5622 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5623 * function for them.
5624 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5625 *
5626 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5627 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5628 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5629 */
5630void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5631                                       void (*iterator)(void *data,
5632                                                struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5633                                       void *data);
5634/**
5635 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5636 *
5637 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5638 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5639 *
5640 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5641 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5642 */
5643void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5644
5645/**
5646 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5647 *
5648 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5649 * workqueue.
5650 *
5651 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5652 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5653 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5654 */
5655void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5656                                  struct delayed_work *dwork,
5657                                  unsigned long delay);
5658
5659/**
5660 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5661 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5662 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5663 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5664 *
5665 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5666 *
5667 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5668 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5669 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5670 */
5671int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5672                                  u16 timeout);
5673
5674/**
5675 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5676 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5677 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5678 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5679 *
5680 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5681 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5682 * from any context.
5683 */
5684void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5685                                      u16 tid);
5686
5687/**
5688 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5689 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5690 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5691 *
5692 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5693 *
5694 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5695 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5696 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5697 */
5698int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5699
5700/**
5701 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5702 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5703 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5704 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5705 *
5706 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5707 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5708 * can be called from any context.
5709 */
5710void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5711                                     u16 tid);
5712
5713/**
5714 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5715 *
5716 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5717 * @addr: station's address
5718 *
5719 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5720 *
5721 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5722 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5723 */
5724struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5725                                         const u8 *addr);
5726
5727/**
5728 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5729 *
5730 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5731 * @addr: remote station's address
5732 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5733 *
5734 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5735 *
5736 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5737 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5738 *
5739 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5740 *      the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5741 *      We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5742 *      logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5743 *      BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5744 *      In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5745 *      is not reliable.
5746 *
5747 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5748 */
5749struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5750                                               const u8 *addr,
5751                                               const u8 *localaddr);
5752
5753/**
5754 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5755 * @hw: the hardware
5756 * @pubsta: the station
5757 * @block: whether to block or unblock
5758 *
5759 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5760 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5761 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5762 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5763 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5764 *
5765 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5766 * manner.
5767 *
5768 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5769 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5770 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5771 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5772 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5773 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5774 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5775 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5776 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5777 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5778 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5779 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5780 * woke up while blocked or not.
5781 */
5782void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5783                               struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5784
5785/**
5786 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5787 * @pubsta: the station
5788 *
5789 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5790 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5791 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5792 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5793 *
5794 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5795 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5796 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5797 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5798 *
5799 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5800 *     driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5801 *     you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5802 *     and restore the _irqsafe version!
5803 */
5804void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5805
5806/**
5807 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5808 * @pubsta: the station
5809 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5810 *
5811 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5812 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5813 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5814 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5815 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5816 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5817 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5818 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5819 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5820 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5821 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5822 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5823 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5824 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5825 */
5826void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5827
5828/**
5829 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
5830 *
5831 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call
5832 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
5833 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
5834 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
5835 *
5836 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
5837 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
5838 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
5839 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
5840 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
5841 * attempts.
5842 *
5843 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
5844 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
5845 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
5846 * them to 0.
5847 *
5848 * @pubsta: the station
5849 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
5850 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
5851 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
5852 */
5853void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5854                                    u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
5855
5856/**
5857 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device
5858 *
5859 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5860 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5861 *
5862 * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can
5863 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false.
5864 */
5865bool
5866ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
5867
5868/**
5869 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5870 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5871 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5872 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5873 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5874 *
5875 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5876 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5877 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5878 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5879 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5880 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
5881 *
5882 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5883 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5884 * set_key callback.
5885 */
5886void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5887                         struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5888                         void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5889                                      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5890                                      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5891                                      struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5892                                      void *data),
5893                         void *iter_data);
5894
5895/**
5896 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5897 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5898 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5899 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5900 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5901 *
5902 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5903 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5904 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5905 * in removal process will be skipped.
5906 *
5907 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5908 * and thus iter must be atomic.
5909 */
5910void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5911                             struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5912                             void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5913                                          struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5914                                          struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5915                                          struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5916                                          void *data),
5917                             void *iter_data);
5918
5919/**
5920 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5921 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5922 * @iter: iterator function
5923 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5924 *
5925 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5926 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5927 * places while calling into the driver.
5928 *
5929 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5930 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5931 * removed.
5932 *
5933 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5934 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5935 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5936 * or not.
5937 */
5938void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5939        struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5940        void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5941                     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5942                     void *data),
5943        void *iter_data);
5944
5945/**
5946 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5947 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5948 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5949 *
5950 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5951 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5952 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5953 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5954 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
5955 * %NULL.
5956 *
5957 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5958 */
5959struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5960                                          struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5961
5962/**
5963 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5964 *
5965 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5966 *
5967 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
5968 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
5969 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5970 */
5971void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5972
5973/**
5974 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5975 *
5976 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5977 *
5978 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
5979 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5980 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
5981 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5982 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
5983 *
5984 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5985 * without connection recovery attempts.
5986 */
5987void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5988
5989/**
5990 * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection
5991 *
5992 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5993 * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired
5994 *
5995 * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a
5996 * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired.
5997 */
5998void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect);
5999
6000/**
6001 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
6002 *
6003 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6004 *
6005 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
6006 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
6007 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
6008 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
6009 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
6010 *
6011 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
6012 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
6013 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
6014 * disconnect normally later.
6015 *
6016 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
6017 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
6018 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
6019 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
6020 */
6021void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6022
6023/**
6024 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
6025 *      rssi threshold triggered
6026 *
6027 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6028 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
6029 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
6030 * @gfp: context flags
6031 *
6032 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
6033 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
6034 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
6035 */
6036void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6037                               enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
6038                               s32 rssi_level,
6039                               gfp_t gfp);
6040
6041/**
6042 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
6043 *
6044 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6045 * @gfp: context flags
6046 */
6047void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
6048
6049/**
6050 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
6051 *
6052 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6053 */
6054void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6055
6056/**
6057 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
6058 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6059 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
6060 *
6061 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
6062 * and wake up the suspended queues.
6063 */
6064void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
6065
6066/**
6067 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
6068 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6069 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
6070 *
6071 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
6072 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
6073 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
6074 */
6075void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6076                            enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
6077
6078/**
6079 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
6080 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6081 */
6082void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6083
6084/**
6085 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
6086 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6087 */
6088void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6089
6090/**
6091 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
6092 *
6093 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
6094 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
6095 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
6096 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
6097 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
6098 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
6099 *
6100 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6101 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
6102 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
6103 */
6104void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
6105                                  const u8 *addr);
6106
6107/**
6108 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
6109 * @pubsta: station struct
6110 * @tid: the session's TID
6111 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
6112 *      assumed to be out of the window after the call
6113 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
6114 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
6115 *
6116 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
6117 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
6118 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
6119 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
6120 */
6121void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
6122                                          u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
6123                                          u16 received_mpdus);
6124
6125/**
6126 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
6127 *
6128 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
6129 * buffer.
6130 *
6131 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6132 * @ra: the peer's destination address
6133 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
6134 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
6135 */
6136void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
6137
6138/**
6139 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
6140 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6141 * @addr: station mac address
6142 * @tid: the rx tid
6143 */
6144void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
6145                                 unsigned int tid);
6146
6147/**
6148 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
6149 *
6150 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6151 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6152 * reordering.
6153 *
6154 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6155 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
6156 *
6157 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6158 * @addr: station mac address
6159 * @tid: the rx tid
6160 */
6161static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6162                                                      const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6163{
6164        if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6165                return;
6166        ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
6167}
6168
6169/**
6170 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
6171 *
6172 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6173 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6174 * reordering.
6175 *
6176 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6177 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
6178 *
6179 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6180 * @addr: station mac address
6181 * @tid: the rx tid
6182 */
6183static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6184                                                     const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6185{
6186        if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6187                return;
6188        ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
6189}
6190
6191/**
6192 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
6193 *
6194 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
6195 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
6196 *
6197 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
6198 *
6199 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6200 * @addr: station mac address
6201 * @tid: the rx tid
6202 */
6203void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6204                                   const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
6205
6206/* Rate control API */
6207
6208/**
6209 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
6210 *
6211 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
6212 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
6213 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
6214 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
6215 *      to be filled in
6216 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
6217 *      which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
6218 *      used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
6219 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
6220 *      RTS threshold
6221 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
6222 *      if the selected rate supports it
6223 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
6224 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
6225 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
6226 */
6227struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
6228        struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
6229        struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
6230        struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
6231        struct sk_buff *skb;
6232        struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
6233        bool rts, short_preamble;
6234        u32 rate_idx_mask;
6235        u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
6236        bool bss;
6237};
6238
6239/**
6240 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
6241 */
6242enum rate_control_capabilities {
6243        /**
6244         * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
6245         * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
6246         * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
6247         * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
6248         * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
6249         */
6250        RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
6251        /**
6252         * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER:
6253         * mac80211 should start A-MPDU sessions on tx
6254         */
6255        RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER = BIT(1),
6256};
6257
6258struct rate_control_ops {
6259        unsigned long capa;
6260        const char *name;
6261        void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6262        void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv,
6263                            struct dentry *debugfsdir);
6264        void (*free)(void *priv);
6265
6266        void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
6267        void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6268                          struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6269                          struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
6270        void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6271                            struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6272                            struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6273                            u32 changed);
6274        void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6275                         void *priv_sta);
6276
6277        void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
6278                              struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6279                              void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
6280        void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6281                          struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6282                          struct sk_buff *skb);
6283        void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6284                         struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
6285
6286        void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
6287                                struct dentry *dir);
6288
6289        u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
6290};
6291
6292static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6293                                 enum nl80211_band band,
6294                                 int index)
6295{
6296        return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
6297}
6298
6299static inline s8
6300rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6301                  struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6302{
6303        int i;
6304
6305        for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6306                if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6307                        return i;
6308
6309        /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
6310        WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
6311
6312        /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
6313        return 0;
6314}
6315
6316static inline
6317bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6318                              struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6319{
6320        unsigned int i;
6321
6322        for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6323                if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6324                        return true;
6325        return false;
6326}
6327
6328/**
6329 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6330 *
6331 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6332 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6333 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6334 * the most recent rate control module decision.
6335 *
6336 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6337 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6338 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6339 */
6340int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6341                           struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6342                           struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6343
6344int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6345void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6346
6347static inline bool
6348conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6349{
6350        return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6351}
6352
6353static inline bool
6354conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6355{
6356        return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6357               conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6358}
6359
6360static inline bool
6361conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6362{
6363        return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6364               conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6365}
6366
6367static inline bool
6368conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6369{
6370        return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6371}
6372
6373static inline bool
6374conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6375{
6376        return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6377                (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6378                (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6379}
6380
6381static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6382ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6383{
6384        if (p2p) {
6385                switch (type) {
6386                case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6387                        return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6388                case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6389                        return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6390                default:
6391                        break;
6392                }
6393        }
6394        return type;
6395}
6396
6397static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6398ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6399{
6400        return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6401}
6402
6403/**
6404 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6405 *
6406 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6407 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6408 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6409 *
6410 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6411 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6412 * matching GroupId management frame.
6413 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6414 */
6415void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6416                                const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6417
6418void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6419                                   int rssi_min_thold,
6420                                   int rssi_max_thold);
6421
6422void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6423
6424/**
6425 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6426 *
6427 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6428 *
6429 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6430 *
6431 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6432 * applicable.
6433 */
6434int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6435
6436/**
6437 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6438 * @vif: virtual interface
6439 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6440 * @gfp: allocation flags
6441 *
6442 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6443 */
6444void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6445                                    struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6446                                    gfp_t gfp);
6447
6448/**
6449 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6450 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6451 * @vif: virtual interface
6452 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6453 * @band: the band to transmit on
6454 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6455 *
6456 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6457 */
6458bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6459                              struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6460                              int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6461
6462/**
6463 * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header
6464 *                               of injected frames.
6465 *
6466 * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields,
6467 * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure
6468 * of the skb before calling this function.
6469 *
6470 * @skb: packet injected by userspace
6471 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
6472 */
6473bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb,
6474                                 struct net_device *dev);
6475
6476/**
6477 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6478 *
6479 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6480 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6481 *
6482 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6483 *
6484 * private:
6485 *
6486 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6487 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6488 */
6489struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6490        u32 next_tsf;
6491        bool has_next_tsf;
6492
6493        u8 absent;
6494
6495        u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6496        struct {
6497                u32 start;
6498                u32 duration;
6499                u32 interval;
6500        } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6501};
6502
6503/**
6504 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6505 *
6506 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6507 * @data: NoA tracking data
6508 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6509 *
6510 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6511 */
6512int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6513                            struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6514
6515/**
6516 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6517 *
6518 * @data: NoA tracking data
6519 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6520 */
6521void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6522
6523/**
6524 * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6525 * @vif: virtual interface
6526 * @peer: the peer's destination address
6527 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6528 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6529 * @gfp: allocation flags
6530 *
6531 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6532 */
6533void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6534                                 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6535                                 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6536
6537/**
6538 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6539 *
6540 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6541 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6542 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6543 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6544 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6545 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6546 *
6547 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6548 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6549 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6550 *
6551 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6552 * @tid: the TID to reserve
6553 *
6554 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6555 */
6556int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6557
6558/**
6559 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6560 *
6561 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6562 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6563 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6564 *
6565 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6566 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6567 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6568 *
6569 * @sta: the station
6570 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6571 */
6572void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6573
6574/**
6575 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6576 *
6577 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6578 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6579 *      ieee80211_next_txq()
6580 *
6581 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6582 *
6583 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6584 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6585 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by by RCU and thus the
6586 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6587 * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6588 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6589 * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6590 *
6591 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
6592 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
6593 */
6594struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6595                                     struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6596
6597/**
6598 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6599 * (in process context)
6600 *
6601 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
6602 * (internally disables bottom halves).
6603 *
6604 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6605 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6606 *      ieee80211_next_txq()
6607 */
6608static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6609                                                      struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6610{
6611        struct sk_buff *skb;
6612
6613        local_bh_disable();
6614        skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
6615        local_bh_enable();
6616
6617        return skb;
6618}
6619
6620/**
6621 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6622 *
6623 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6624 * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6625 *
6626 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6627 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6628 * driver has finished scheduling it.
6629 */
6630struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6631
6632/**
6633 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6634 *
6635 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6636 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6637 *
6638 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6639 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6640 */
6641void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6642
6643/* (deprecated) */
6644static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6645{
6646}
6647
6648/**
6649 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6650 *
6651 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6652 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6653 *
6654 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
6655 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
6656 *
6657 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
6658 * this TXQ internally.
6659 */
6660void ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6661
6662/**
6663 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6664 *
6665 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6666 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6667 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
6668 *
6669 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
6670 * internally.
6671 */
6672void ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6673                          bool force);
6674
6675/**
6676 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
6677 *
6678 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
6679 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
6680 * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
6681 * next_txq().
6682 *
6683 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
6684 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
6685 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
6686 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
6687 * again.
6688 *
6689 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
6690 * aligned aginst driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
6691 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
6692 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
6693 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
6694 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
6695 *
6696 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6697 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6698 */
6699bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6700                                struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6701
6702/**
6703 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6704 *
6705 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6706 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6707 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6708 *
6709 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6710 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6711 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6712 */
6713void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6714                             unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6715                             unsigned long *byte_cnt);
6716
6717/**
6718 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6719 *
6720 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6721 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6722 *
6723 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6724 * @inst_id: the local instance id
6725 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6726 * @gfp: allocation flags
6727 */
6728void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6729                                   u8 inst_id,
6730                                   enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6731                                   gfp_t gfp);
6732
6733/**
6734 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6735 *
6736 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6737 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6738 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6739 *
6740 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6741 * @match: match event information
6742 * @gfp: allocation flags
6743 */
6744void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6745                              struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6746                              gfp_t gfp);
6747
6748/**
6749 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX.
6750 *
6751 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6752 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length.
6753 *
6754 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6755 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate
6756 *          information.
6757 * @len: frame length in bytes
6758 */
6759u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6760                              struct ieee80211_rx_status *status,
6761                              int len);
6762
6763/**
6764 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX.
6765 *
6766 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6767 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length.
6768 *
6769 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6770 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
6771 * @len: frame length in bytes
6772 */
6773u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6774                              struct ieee80211_tx_info *info,
6775                              int len);
6776/**
6777 * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading.
6778 *
6779 * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3
6780 * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the
6781 * hardware or firmware.
6782 *
6783 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6784 * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off
6785 */
6786bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable);
6787
6788/**
6789 * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template.
6790 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6791 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6792 *
6793 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
6794 *
6795 * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error.
6796 */
6797struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6798                                                  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6799
6800/**
6801 * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast
6802 *      probe response template.
6803 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6804 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6805 *
6806 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
6807 *
6808 * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error.
6809 */
6810struct sk_buff *
6811ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6812                                          struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6813
6814/**
6815 * ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify - notify userland about a BSS color
6816 * collision.
6817 *
6818 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6819 * @color_bitmap: a 64 bit bitmap representing the colors that the local BSS is
6820 *      aware of.
6821 */
6822void
6823ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6824                                       u64 color_bitmap);
6825
6826/**
6827 * ieee80211_is_tx_data - check if frame is a data frame
6828 *
6829 * The function is used to check if a frame is a data frame. Frames with
6830 * hardware encapsulation enabled are data frames.
6831 *
6832 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
6833 */
6834static inline bool ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff *skb)
6835{
6836        struct ieee80211_tx_info *info = IEEE80211_SKB_CB(skb);
6837        struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (void *) skb->data;
6838
6839        return info->flags & IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP ||
6840               ieee80211_is_data(hdr->frame_control);
6841}
6842
6843#endif /* MAC80211_H */
6844